* doc/as.texinfo (Overview): Remove @samp from MIPS ISA names.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
238 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
239 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
240 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
241 [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
242 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
243 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
244 @c
245 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
246 @c Add an empty line for separation.
247 @ifset AARCH64
248
249 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
250 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
251 @end ifset
252 @ifset ALPHA
253
254 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
255 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
256 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
257 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
258 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
259 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
260 @end ifset
261 @ifset ARC
262
263 @emph{Target ARC options:}
264 [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
265 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
266 @end ifset
267 @ifset ARM
268
269 @emph{Target ARM options:}
270 @c Don't document the deprecated options
271 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
272 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
273 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
274 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
275 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
276 [@b{-mthumb}]
277 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
278 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
279 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
280 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
281 @end ifset
282 @ifset Blackfin
283
284 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
285 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
286 [@b{-mfdpic}]
287 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
288 [@b{-mnopic}]
289 @end ifset
290 @ifset CRIS
291
292 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
293 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
294 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
295 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
296 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
297 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
298 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
299 @end ifset
300 @ifset D10V
301
302 @emph{Target D10V options:}
303 [@b{-O}]
304 @end ifset
305 @ifset D30V
306
307 @emph{Target D30V options:}
308 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
309 @end ifset
310 @ifset EPIPHANY
311
312 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
313 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
314 @end ifset
315 @ifset H8
316
317 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
318 [-h-tick-hex]
319 @end ifset
320 @ifset HPPA
321 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
322 @end ifset
323 @ifset I80386
324
325 @emph{Target i386 options:}
326 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
327 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
328 @end ifset
329 @ifset I960
330
331 @emph{Target i960 options:}
332 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
333 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
334 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
335 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
336 @end ifset
337 @ifset IA64
338
339 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
340 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
341 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
342 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
343 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
344 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
345 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
346 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
347 @end ifset
348 @ifset IP2K
349
350 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
351 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
352 @end ifset
353 @ifset M32C
354
355 @emph{Target M32C options:}
356 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
357 @end ifset
358 @ifset M32R
359
360 @emph{Target M32R options:}
361 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
362 @b{--W[n]p}]
363 @end ifset
364 @ifset M680X0
365
366 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
367 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
368 @end ifset
369 @ifset M68HC11
370
371 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
372 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
373 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
374 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
375 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
376 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
377 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
378 @end ifset
379 @ifset MCORE
380
381 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
382 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
383 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
384 @end ifset
385 @ifset METAG
386
387 @emph{Target Meta options:}
388 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
389 @end ifset
390 @ifset MICROBLAZE
391 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
392 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
393 @end ifset
394 @ifset MIPS
395
396 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
397 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
398 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
399 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
400 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
401 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
402 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
403 [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
404 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
405 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
406 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
407 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
408 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
409 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
410 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
411 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
412 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
413 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
414 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
415 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
416 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
417 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
418 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
419 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
420 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
421 @end ifset
422 @ifset MMIX
423
424 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
425 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
426 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
427 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
428 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
429 @end ifset
430 @ifset NIOSII
431
432 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
433 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
434 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
435 @end ifset
436 @ifset PDP11
437
438 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
439 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
440 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
441 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
442 @end ifset
443 @ifset PJ
444
445 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
446 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
447 @end ifset
448 @ifset PPC
449
450 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
451 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
452 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
453 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
454 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
455 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
456 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-ma2}|@b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
457 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
458 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
459 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
460 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
461 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
462 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
463 @end ifset
464 @ifset RX
465
466 @emph{Target RX options:}
467 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
468 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
469 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
470 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
471 [@b{-mpid}]
472 [@b{-mrelax}]
473 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
474 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
475 @end ifset
476 @ifset S390
477
478 @emph{Target s390 options:}
479 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
480 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
481 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
482 @end ifset
483 @ifset SCORE
484
485 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
486 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
487 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
488 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
489 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
490 @end ifset
491 @ifset SPARC
492
493 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
494 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
495 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
496 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
497 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
498 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
499 @end ifset
500 @ifset TIC54X
501
502 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
503 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
504 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
505 @end ifset
506
507 @ifset TIC6X
508
509 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
510 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
511 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
512 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
513 @end ifset
514 @ifset TILEGX
515
516 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
517 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
518 @end ifset
519 @ifset TILEPRO
520 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
521 @end ifset
522
523 @ifset XTENSA
524
525 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
526 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
527 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
528 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
529 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
530 @end ifset
531
532 @ifset Z80
533
534 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
535 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
536 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
537 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
538 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
539 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
540 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
541 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
542 @end ifset
543
544 @ifset Z8000
545 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
546 @end ifset
547
548 @c man end
549 @end smallexample
550
551 @c man begin OPTIONS
552
553 @table @gcctabopt
554 @include at-file.texi
555
556 @item -a[cdghlmns]
557 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
558
559 @table @gcctabopt
560 @item -ac
561 omit false conditionals
562
563 @item -ad
564 omit debugging directives
565
566 @item -ag
567 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
568
569 @item -ah
570 include high-level source
571
572 @item -al
573 include assembly
574
575 @item -am
576 include macro expansions
577
578 @item -an
579 omit forms processing
580
581 @item -as
582 include symbols
583
584 @item =file
585 set the name of the listing file
586 @end table
587
588 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
589 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
590 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
591
592 @item --alternate
593 Begin in alternate macro mode.
594 @ifclear man
595 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
596 @end ifclear
597
598 @item --compress-debug-sections
599 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed
600 to begin with @samp{.zdebug}, and the resulting object file may not be
601 compatible with older linkers and object file utilities.
602
603 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
604 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is the default.
605
606 @item -D
607 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
608 other assemblers.
609
610 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
611 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
612 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
613
614 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
615 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
616 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
617 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
618 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
619 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
620
621 @item -f
622 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
623 compiler output).
624
625 @item -g
626 @itemx --gen-debug
627 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
628 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
629 ECOFF or DWARF2.
630
631 @item --gstabs
632 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
633 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
634
635 @item --gstabs+
636 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
637 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
638 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
639 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
640 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
641
642 @item --gdwarf-2
643 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
644 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
645 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
646
647 @item --gdwarf-sections
648 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
649 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
650 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
651 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
652 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
653 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
654 suffix.
655
656 @item --size-check=error
657 @itemx --size-check=warning
658 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
659
660 @item --help
661 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
662
663 @item --target-help
664 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
665
666 @item -I @var{dir}
667 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
668
669 @item -J
670 Don't warn about signed overflow.
671
672 @item -K
673 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
674 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
675 @end ifclear
676 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
677 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
678 @end ifset
679
680 @item -L
681 @itemx --keep-locals
682 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
683 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
684 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
685 @ifclear man
686 @xref{Symbol Names}.
687 @end ifclear
688
689 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
690 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
691 listing to @var{number}.
692
693 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
694 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
695 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
696
697 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
698 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
699 @var{number} bytes.
700
701 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
702 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
703 to @var{number} + 1.
704
705 @item -o @var{objfile}
706 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
707
708 @item -R
709 Fold the data section into the text section.
710
711 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
712 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
713 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
714 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
715 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
716 requirements at the expense of speed.
717
718 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
719 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
720 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
721 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
722
723 @item --statistics
724 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
725 assembly.
726
727 @item --strip-local-absolute
728 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
729
730 @item -v
731 @itemx -version
732 Print the @command{as} version.
733
734 @item --version
735 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
736
737 @item -W
738 @itemx --no-warn
739 Suppress warning messages.
740
741 @item --fatal-warnings
742 Treat warnings as errors.
743
744 @item --warn
745 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
746
747 @item -w
748 Ignored.
749
750 @item -x
751 Ignored.
752
753 @item -Z
754 Generate an object file even after errors.
755
756 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
757 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
758
759 @end table
760 @c man end
761
762 @ifset AARCH64
763
764 @ifclear man
765 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
766 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
767 @end ifclear
768
769 @ifset man
770 @c man begin OPTIONS
771 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
772 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
773 @c man end
774 @c man begin INCLUDE
775 @include c-aarch64.texi
776 @c ended inside the included file
777 @end ifset
778
779 @end ifset
780
781 @ifset ALPHA
782
783 @ifclear man
784 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
785 for an Alpha processor.
786 @end ifclear
787
788 @ifset man
789 @c man begin OPTIONS
790 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
791 processor.
792 @c man end
793 @c man begin INCLUDE
794 @include c-alpha.texi
795 @c ended inside the included file
796 @end ifset
797
798 @end ifset
799
800 @c man begin OPTIONS
801 @ifset ARC
802 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
803 an ARC processor.
804
805 @table @gcctabopt
806 @item -marc[5|6|7|8]
807 This option selects the core processor variant.
808 @item -EB | -EL
809 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
810 @end table
811 @end ifset
812
813 @ifset ARM
814 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
815 processor family.
816
817 @table @gcctabopt
818 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
819 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
820 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
821 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
822 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
823 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
824 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
825 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
826 @item -mthumb
827 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
828 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
829 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
830 @item -EB | -EL
831 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
832 @item -mthumb-interwork
833 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
834 ARM code in mind.
835 @item -k
836 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
837 @end table
838 @end ifset
839 @c man end
840
841 @ifset Blackfin
842
843 @ifclear man
844 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
845 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
846 @end ifclear
847
848 @ifset man
849 @c man begin OPTIONS
850 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
851 the Blackfin processor family.
852 @c man end
853 @c man begin INCLUDE
854 @include c-bfin.texi
855 @c ended inside the included file
856 @end ifset
857
858 @end ifset
859
860 @c man begin OPTIONS
861 @ifset CRIS
862 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
863 @end ifset
864
865 @ifset D10V
866 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
867 a D10V processor.
868 @table @gcctabopt
869 @cindex D10V optimization
870 @cindex optimization, D10V
871 @item -O
872 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
873 @end table
874 @end ifset
875
876 @ifset D30V
877 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
878 processor.
879 @table @gcctabopt
880 @cindex D30V optimization
881 @cindex optimization, D30V
882 @item -O
883 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
884
885 @cindex D30V nops
886 @item -n
887 Warn when nops are generated.
888
889 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
890 @item -N
891 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
892 @end table
893 @end ifset
894 @c man end
895
896 @ifset EPIPHANY
897 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
898 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
899
900 @ifclear man
901 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
902 configured for an Epiphany processor.
903 @end ifclear
904
905 @ifset man
906 @c man begin OPTIONS
907 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
908 an Epiphany processor.
909 @c man end
910 @c man begin INCLUDE
911 @include c-epiphany.texi
912 @c ended inside the included file
913 @end ifset
914
915 @end ifset
916
917 @ifset H8300
918
919 @ifclear man
920 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
921 for an H8/300 processor.
922 @end ifclear
923
924 @ifset man
925 @c man begin OPTIONS
926 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
927 processor.
928 @c man end
929 @c man begin INCLUDE
930 @include c-h8300.texi
931 @c ended inside the included file
932 @end ifset
933
934 @end ifset
935
936 @ifset I80386
937
938 @ifclear man
939 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
940 configured for an i386 processor.
941 @end ifclear
942
943 @ifset man
944 @c man begin OPTIONS
945 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
946 an i386 processor.
947 @c man end
948 @c man begin INCLUDE
949 @include c-i386.texi
950 @c ended inside the included file
951 @end ifset
952
953 @end ifset
954
955 @c man begin OPTIONS
956 @ifset I960
957 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
958 Intel 80960 processor.
959
960 @table @gcctabopt
961 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
962 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
963
964 @item -b
965 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
966
967 @item -no-relax
968 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
969 error if necessary.
970
971 @end table
972 @end ifset
973
974 @ifset IP2K
975 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
976 Ubicom IP2K series.
977
978 @table @gcctabopt
979
980 @item -mip2022ext
981 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
982
983 @item -mip2022
984 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
985 just the basic IP2022 ones.
986
987 @end table
988 @end ifset
989
990 @ifset M32C
991 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
992 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
993
994 @table @gcctabopt
995
996 @item -m32c
997 Assemble M32C instructions.
998
999 @item -m16c
1000 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1001
1002 @item -relax
1003 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1004
1005 @item -h-tick-hex
1006 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1007
1008 @end table
1009 @end ifset
1010
1011 @ifset M32R
1012 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1013 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1014
1015 @table @gcctabopt
1016
1017 @item --m32rx
1018 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1019 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1020
1021 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1022 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1023 encountered.
1024
1025 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1026 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1027 encountered.
1028
1029 @end table
1030 @end ifset
1031
1032 @ifset M680X0
1033 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1034 Motorola 68000 series.
1035
1036 @table @gcctabopt
1037
1038 @item -l
1039 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1040
1041 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1042 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1043 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1044 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1045 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1046
1047 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1048 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1049 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1050 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1051 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1052 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1053
1054 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1055 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1056 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1057
1058 @end table
1059 @end ifset
1060
1061 @ifset NIOSII
1062
1063 @ifclear man
1064 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1065 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1066 @end ifclear
1067
1068 @ifset man
1069 @c man begin OPTIONS
1070 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1071 Altera Nios II processor.
1072 @c man end
1073 @c man begin INCLUDE
1074 @include c-nios2.texi
1075 @c ended inside the included file
1076 @end ifset
1077 @end ifset
1078
1079 @ifset PDP11
1080
1081 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1082 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1083
1084 @table @gcctabopt
1085 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1086 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1087 default is @option{-mpic}.
1088
1089 @item -mall
1090 @itemx -mall-extensions
1091 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1092
1093 @item -mno-extensions
1094 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1095
1096 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1097 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1098
1099 @item -m@var{cpu}
1100 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1101 disable all other extensions.
1102
1103 @item -m@var{machine}
1104 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1105 model, and disable all other extensions.
1106 @end table
1107
1108 @end ifset
1109
1110 @ifset PJ
1111 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1112 a picoJava processor.
1113
1114 @table @gcctabopt
1115
1116 @cindex PJ endianness
1117 @cindex endianness, PJ
1118 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1119 @item -mb
1120 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1121
1122 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1123 @item -ml
1124 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1125
1126 @end table
1127 @end ifset
1128
1129 @ifset M68HC11
1130 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1131 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1132
1133 @table @gcctabopt
1134
1135 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1136 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1137 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1138
1139 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1140 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1141 XGATE address space.
1142
1143 @item -mshort
1144 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1145
1146 @item -mlong
1147 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1148
1149 @item -mshort-double
1150 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1151
1152 @item -mlong-double
1153 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1154
1155 @item --force-long-branches
1156 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1157 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1158 sub routine.
1159
1160 @item -S | --short-branches
1161 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1162 when the offset is out of range.
1163
1164 @item --strict-direct-mode
1165 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1166 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1167
1168 @item --print-insn-syntax
1169 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1170
1171 @item --print-opcodes
1172 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1173
1174 @item --generate-example
1175 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1176 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1177
1178 @end table
1179 @end ifset
1180
1181 @ifset SPARC
1182 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1183 for the SPARC architecture:
1184
1185 @table @gcctabopt
1186 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1187 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1188 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1189
1190 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1191 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1192
1193 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1194 UltraSPARC extensions.
1195
1196 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1197 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1198 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1199
1200 @item -bump
1201 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1202 @end table
1203 @end ifset
1204
1205 @ifset TIC54X
1206 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1207 architecture.
1208
1209 @table @gcctabopt
1210 @item -mfar-mode
1211 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1212 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1213 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1214 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1215 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1216 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1217 behaviour in the shell.
1218 @end table
1219 @end ifset
1220
1221 @ifset MIPS
1222 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1223 a MIPS processor.
1224
1225 @table @gcctabopt
1226 @item -G @var{num}
1227 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1228 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1229 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1230
1231 @cindex MIPS endianness
1232 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1233 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1234 @item -EB
1235 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1236
1237 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1238 @item -EL
1239 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1240
1241 @cindex MIPS ISA
1242 @item -mips1
1243 @itemx -mips2
1244 @itemx -mips3
1245 @itemx -mips4
1246 @itemx -mips5
1247 @itemx -mips32
1248 @itemx -mips32r2
1249 @itemx -mips64
1250 @itemx -mips64r2
1251 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1252 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1253 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1254 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1255 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips64}, and
1256 @samp{-mips64r2} correspond to generic MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2,
1257 MIPS64, and MIPS64 Release 2 ISA processors, respectively.
1258
1259 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1260 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1261
1262 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1263 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1264
1265 @item -mfix7000
1266 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1267 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1268 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1269
1270 @item -mdebug
1271 @itemx -no-mdebug
1272 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1273 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1274
1275 @item -mpdr
1276 @itemx -mno-pdr
1277 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1278
1279 @item -mgp32
1280 @itemx -mfp32
1281 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1282 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1283 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1284 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1285
1286 @item -mips16
1287 @itemx -no-mips16
1288 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1289 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1290 turns off this option.
1291
1292 @item -mmicromips
1293 @itemx -mno-micromips
1294 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1295 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1296 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1297 at the start of the assembly file.
1298
1299 @item -msmartmips
1300 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1301 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1302 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1303 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1304
1305 @item -mips3d
1306 @itemx -no-mips3d
1307 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1308 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1309 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1310
1311 @item -mdmx
1312 @itemx -no-mdmx
1313 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1314 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1315 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1316
1317 @item -mdsp
1318 @itemx -mno-dsp
1319 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1320 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1321 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1322
1323 @item -mdspr2
1324 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1325 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1326 This option implies -mdsp.
1327 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1328 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1329
1330 @item -mmt
1331 @itemx -mno-mt
1332 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1333 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1334 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1335
1336 @item -mmcu
1337 @itemx -mno-mcu
1338 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1339 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1340 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1341
1342 @item -minsn32
1343 @itemx -mno-insn32
1344 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1345 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1346 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1347 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1348 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1349 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1350 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1351
1352 @item --construct-floats
1353 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1354 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1355 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1356 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1357 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1358 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1359
1360 @item --relax-branch
1361 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1362 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1363 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1364 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1365
1366 @cindex emulation
1367 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1368 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1369 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1370 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1371 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1372
1373 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1374 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1375 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1376 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1377 preferred options instead.
1378
1379 @item -nocpp
1380 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1381 the native tools.
1382
1383 @item --trap
1384 @itemx --no-trap
1385 @itemx --break
1386 @itemx --no-break
1387 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1388 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1389 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1390 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1391 break exception.
1392
1393 @item -n
1394 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1395 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1396 @end table
1397 @end ifset
1398
1399 @ifset MCORE
1400 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1401 an MCore processor.
1402
1403 @table @gcctabopt
1404 @item -jsri2bsr
1405 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1406 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1407 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1408
1409 @item -sifilter
1410 @itemx -nosifilter
1411 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1412 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1413
1414 @item -relax
1415 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1416
1417 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1418 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1419 can be assembled.
1420
1421 @item -EB
1422 Assemble for a big endian target.
1423
1424 @item -EL
1425 Assemble for a little endian target.
1426
1427 @end table
1428 @end ifset
1429 @c man end
1430
1431 @ifset METAG
1432
1433 @ifclear man
1434 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1435 for a Meta processor.
1436 @end ifclear
1437
1438 @ifset man
1439 @c man begin OPTIONS
1440 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1441 Meta processor.
1442 @c man end
1443 @c man begin INCLUDE
1444 @include c-metag.texi
1445 @c ended inside the included file
1446 @end ifset
1447
1448 @end ifset
1449
1450 @c man begin OPTIONS
1451 @ifset MMIX
1452 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1453 @end ifset
1454
1455 @c man end
1456 @ifset PPC
1457
1458 @ifclear man
1459 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1460 for a PowerPC processor.
1461 @end ifclear
1462
1463 @ifset man
1464 @c man begin OPTIONS
1465 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1466 PowerPC processor.
1467 @c man end
1468 @c man begin INCLUDE
1469 @include c-ppc.texi
1470 @c ended inside the included file
1471 @end ifset
1472
1473 @end ifset
1474
1475 @c man begin OPTIONS
1476 @ifset RX
1477 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1478 @end ifset
1479
1480 @ifset S390
1481 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1482 processor family.
1483
1484 @table @gcctabopt
1485 @item -m31
1486 @itemx -m64
1487 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1488 @item -mesa
1489 @item -mzarch
1490 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1491 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1492 @item -march=@var{processor}
1493 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1494 @samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, @samp{z10},
1495 @samp{z196}, or @samp{zEC12}.
1496 @item -mregnames
1497 @itemx -mno-regnames
1498 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1499 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1500 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1501 but evaluates to zero.
1502 @end table
1503 @end ifset
1504 @c man end
1505
1506 @ifset TIC6X
1507
1508 @ifclear man
1509 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1510 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1511 @end ifclear
1512
1513 @ifset man
1514 @c man begin OPTIONS
1515 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1516 TMS320C6000 processor.
1517 @c man end
1518 @c man begin INCLUDE
1519 @include c-tic6x.texi
1520 @c ended inside the included file
1521 @end ifset
1522
1523 @end ifset
1524
1525 @ifset TILEGX
1526
1527 @ifclear man
1528 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1529 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1530 @end ifclear
1531
1532 @ifset man
1533 @c man begin OPTIONS
1534 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1535 processor.
1536 @c man end
1537 @c man begin INCLUDE
1538 @include c-tilegx.texi
1539 @c ended inside the included file
1540 @end ifset
1541
1542 @end ifset
1543
1544 @ifset XTENSA
1545
1546 @ifclear man
1547 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1548 for an Xtensa processor.
1549 @end ifclear
1550
1551 @ifset man
1552 @c man begin OPTIONS
1553 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1554 Xtensa processor.
1555 @c man end
1556 @c man begin INCLUDE
1557 @include c-xtensa.texi
1558 @c ended inside the included file
1559 @end ifset
1560
1561 @end ifset
1562
1563 @c man begin OPTIONS
1564
1565 @ifset Z80
1566 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1567 a Z80 family processor.
1568 @table @gcctabopt
1569 @item -z80
1570 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1571 @item -r800
1572 Assemble for R800 processor.
1573 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1574 @itemx -Wnud
1575 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1576 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1577 @itemx -Wnup
1578 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1579 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1580 @itemx -Wud
1581 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1582 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1583 @itemx -Wup
1584 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1585 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1586 @itemx -Fud
1587 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1588 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1589 @itemx -Fup
1590 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1591 @end table
1592 @end ifset
1593
1594 @c man end
1595
1596 @menu
1597 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1598 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1599 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1600 * Command Line:: Command Line
1601 * Input Files:: Input Files
1602 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1603 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1604 @end menu
1605
1606 @node Manual
1607 @section Structure of this Manual
1608
1609 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1610 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1611 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1612 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1613 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1614
1615 @ifclear GENERIC
1616 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1617 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1618 @end ifclear
1619 @ifset GENERIC
1620 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1621 various flavors of the assembler.
1622 @end ifset
1623
1624 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1625 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1626 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1627 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1628 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1629 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1630 particular architecture.
1631 @ifset GENERIC
1632 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1633 machine architecture manual for this information.
1634 @end ifset
1635 @ifclear GENERIC
1636 @ifset H8/300
1637 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1638 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1639 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1640 @end ifset
1641 @ifset SH
1642 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1643 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1644 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1645 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1646 @end ifset
1647 @ifset Z8000
1648 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1649 @end ifset
1650 @end ifclear
1651
1652 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1653 @ignore
1654 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1655 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1656 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1657 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1658 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1659 qualification.
1660
1661 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1662 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1663 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1664 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1665 @end ignore
1666
1667 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1668 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1669 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1670 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1671 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1672 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1673 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1674 @c directives).
1675
1676 @node GNU Assembler
1677 @section The GNU Assembler
1678
1679 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1680
1681 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1682 @ifclear GENERIC
1683 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1684 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1685 @end ifclear
1686 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1687 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1688 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1689 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1690 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1691
1692 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1693 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1694 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1695 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1696 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1697 machine would assemble.
1698 @ifset VAX
1699 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1700 @end ifset
1701 @ifset M680X0
1702 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1703 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1704 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1705 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1706 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1707 @end ifset
1708
1709 @c man end
1710
1711 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1712 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1713 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1714
1715 @node Object Formats
1716 @section Object File Formats
1717
1718 @cindex object file format
1719 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1720 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1721 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1722 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1723 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1724 @ifclear GENERIC
1725 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1726 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1727 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1728 @end ifclear
1729 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1730 @ifset I960
1731 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1732 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1733 @end ifset
1734 @ifset HPPA
1735 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1736 SOM or ELF format object files.
1737 @end ifset
1738 @end ifclear
1739
1740 @node Command Line
1741 @section Command Line
1742
1743 @cindex command line conventions
1744
1745 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1746 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1747 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1748 significant.
1749
1750 @cindex standard input, as input file
1751 @kindex --
1752 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1753 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1754
1755 @cindex options, command line
1756 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1757 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
1758 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
1759 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1760 the letter is important. All options are optional.
1761
1762 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
1763 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1764 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1765 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
1766
1767 @smallexample
1768 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1769 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1770 @end smallexample
1771
1772 @node Input Files
1773 @section Input Files
1774
1775 @cindex input
1776 @cindex source program
1777 @cindex files, input
1778 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1779 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
1780 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1781 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1782
1783 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1784 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
1785 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1786 order specified.
1787
1788 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1789 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1790 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
1791 (The standard input is also a file.)
1792
1793 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1794 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
1795 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1796 is taken to be an input file name.
1797
1798 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1799 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
1800 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1801 to assemble.
1802
1803 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1804 in your command line.
1805
1806 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1807 file.
1808
1809 @c man end
1810
1811 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1812
1813 @cindex input file linenumbers
1814 @cindex line numbers, in input files
1815 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1816 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
1817 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1818 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1819
1820 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1821 to @command{@value{AS}}.
1822
1823 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1824 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
1825 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1826 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1827 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
1828 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1829
1830 @node Object
1831 @section Output (Object) File
1832
1833 @cindex object file
1834 @cindex output file
1835 @kindex a.out
1836 @kindex .o
1837 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1838 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
1839 is the object file. Its default name is
1840 @ifclear BOUT
1841 @code{a.out}.
1842 @end ifclear
1843 @ifset BOUT
1844 @ifset GENERIC
1845 @code{a.out}, or
1846 @end ifset
1847 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1848 @end ifset
1849 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
1850 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
1851 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1852 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
1853 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1854
1855 @cindex linker
1856 @kindex ld
1857 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
1858 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1859 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1860 information for the debugger.
1861
1862 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1863 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1864
1865 @node Errors
1866 @section Error and Warning Messages
1867
1868 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1869
1870 @cindex error messages
1871 @cindex warning messages
1872 @cindex messages from assembler
1873 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
1874 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
1875 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
1876 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
1877 grave problem that stops the assembly.
1878
1879 @c man end
1880
1881 @cindex format of warning messages
1882 Warning messages have the format
1883
1884 @smallexample
1885 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
1886 @end smallexample
1887
1888 @noindent
1889 @cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
1890 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If a logical file name has been given
1891 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
1892 the current input file is used. If a logical line number was given
1893 @ifset GENERIC
1894 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
1895 @end ifset
1896 then it is used to calculate the number printed,
1897 otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed. The
1898 message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
1899 tradition).
1900
1901 @cindex format of error messages
1902 Error messages have the format
1903 @smallexample
1904 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
1905 @end smallexample
1906 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
1907 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
1908 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
1909
1910 @node Invoking
1911 @chapter Command-Line Options
1912
1913 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
1914 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
1915 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
1916 for options specific
1917 @ifclear GENERIC
1918 to the @value{TARGET} target.
1919 @end ifclear
1920 @ifset GENERIC
1921 to particular machine architectures.
1922 @end ifset
1923
1924 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1925
1926 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
1927 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
1928 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
1929 by commas. For example:
1930
1931 @smallexample
1932 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
1933 @end smallexample
1934
1935 @noindent
1936 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
1937 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
1938 local symbols in the symbol table).
1939
1940 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
1941 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
1942 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
1943 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
1944 assembler.)
1945
1946 @c man end
1947
1948 @menu
1949 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
1950 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
1951 * D:: -D for compatibility
1952 * f:: -f to work faster
1953 * I:: -I for .include search path
1954 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1955 * K:: -K for compatibility
1956 @end ifclear
1957 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1958 * K:: -K for difference tables
1959 @end ifset
1960
1961 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
1962 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
1963 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
1964 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
1965 * o:: -o to name the object file
1966 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
1967 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
1968 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
1969 * v:: -v to announce version
1970 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
1971 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
1972 @end menu
1973
1974 @node a
1975 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
1976
1977 @kindex -a
1978 @kindex -ac
1979 @kindex -ad
1980 @kindex -ag
1981 @kindex -ah
1982 @kindex -al
1983 @kindex -an
1984 @kindex -as
1985 @cindex listings, enabling
1986 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
1987
1988 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
1989 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
1990 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
1991 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
1992 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
1993 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
1994 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
1995 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
1996 also.
1997
1998 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
1999 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2000
2001 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2002 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2003 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2004 omitted from the listing.
2005
2006 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2007 listing.
2008
2009 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2010 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2011 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2012 @code{.sbttl}.
2013 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2014 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2015 listing-control directives have no effect.
2016
2017 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2018 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2019
2020 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2021 because it
2022 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2023 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2024 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2025 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2026 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2027
2028 @node alternate
2029 @section @option{--alternate}
2030
2031 @kindex --alternate
2032 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2033
2034 @node D
2035 @section @option{-D}
2036
2037 @kindex -D
2038 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2039 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2040 @command{@value{AS}}.
2041
2042 @node f
2043 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2044
2045 @kindex -f
2046 @cindex trusted compiler
2047 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2048 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2049 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2050 and comment preprocessing on
2051 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2052 ,Preprocessing}.
2053
2054 @quotation
2055 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2056 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2057 not work correctly.
2058 @end quotation
2059
2060 @node I
2061 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2062
2063 @kindex -I @var{path}
2064 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2065 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2066 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2067 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2068 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2069 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2070 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2071 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2072 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2073 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2074
2075 @node K
2076 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2077
2078 @kindex -K
2079 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2080 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2081 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2082 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2083 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2084 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2085 alteration on other platforms.
2086 @end ifclear
2087
2088 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2089 @cindex difference tables, warning
2090 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2091 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2092 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2093 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2094 is done.
2095 @end ifset
2096
2097 @node L
2098 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2099
2100 @kindex -L
2101 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2102 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2103 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2104 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2105 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2106 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2107 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2108 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2109
2110 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2111 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2112 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2113
2114 @node listing
2115 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2116
2117 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2118 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2119 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2120 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2121 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2122 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2123 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2124 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2125
2126 @table @gcctabopt
2127 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2128 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2129 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2130 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2131 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2132
2133 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2134 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2135 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2136 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2137 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2138 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2139 switch is used the default is to one.
2140
2141 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2142 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2143 @cindex Width of source line output
2144 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2145 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2146 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2147
2148 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2149 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2150 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2151 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2152 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2153 @end table
2154
2155 @node M
2156 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2157
2158 @kindex -M
2159 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2160 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2161 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2162 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2163 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2164 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2165 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2166 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2167 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2168
2169 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2170 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2171 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2172 individually. These are:
2173
2174 @itemize @bullet
2175 @item global symbols in common section
2176
2177 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2178 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2179 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2180 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2181 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2182
2183 @item complex relocations
2184
2185 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2186 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2187 are not support by other object file formats.
2188
2189 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2190
2191 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2192 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2193 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2194 script.
2195
2196 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2197
2198 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2199 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2200
2201 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2202
2203 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2204 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2205 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2206 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2207 assigned within a linker script.
2208 @end itemize
2209
2210 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2211 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2212 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2213
2214 @itemize @bullet
2215
2216 @item EBCDIC strings
2217
2218 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2219
2220 @item packed binary coded decimal
2221
2222 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2223 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2224
2225 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2226
2227 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2228
2229 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2230
2231 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2232
2233 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2234
2235 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2236 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2237 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2238 these options serve no purpose.
2239
2240 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2241
2242 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2243 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2244 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2245
2246 @item other @code{OPT} options
2247
2248 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2249 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2250
2251 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2252
2253 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2254 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2255
2256 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2257
2258 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2259
2260 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2261
2262 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2263
2264 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2265
2266 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2267
2268 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2269
2270 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2271
2272 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2273
2274 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2275
2276 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2277
2278 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2279
2280 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2281
2282 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2283
2284 @end itemize
2285
2286 @node MD
2287 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2288
2289 @kindex --MD
2290 @cindex dependency tracking
2291 @cindex make rules
2292
2293 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2294 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2295 dependencies of the main source file.
2296
2297 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2298
2299 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2300
2301 @node o
2302 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2303
2304 @kindex -o
2305 @cindex naming object file
2306 @cindex object file name
2307 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2308 default it has the name
2309 @ifset GENERIC
2310 @ifset I960
2311 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2312 @end ifset
2313 @ifclear I960
2314 @file{a.out}.
2315 @end ifclear
2316 @end ifset
2317 @ifclear GENERIC
2318 @ifset I960
2319 @file{b.out}.
2320 @end ifset
2321 @ifclear I960
2322 @file{a.out}.
2323 @end ifclear
2324 @end ifclear
2325 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2326 object file a different name.
2327
2328 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2329 existing file of the same name.
2330
2331 @node R
2332 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2333
2334 @kindex -R
2335 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2336 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2337 @cindex joining text and data sections
2338 @cindex merging text and data sections
2339 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2340 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2341 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2342 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2343 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2344 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2345
2346 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2347 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2348 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2349 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2350
2351 @ifset COFF-ELF
2352 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2353 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2354 @samp{.data}.
2355 @end ifset
2356
2357 @ifset HPPA
2358 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2359 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2360 @end ifset
2361
2362 @node statistics
2363 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2364
2365 @kindex --statistics
2366 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2367 @cindex time, total for assembly
2368 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2369 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2370 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2371 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2372 seconds).
2373
2374 @node traditional-format
2375 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2376
2377 @kindex --traditional-format
2378 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2379 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2380 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2381
2382 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2383 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2384
2385 @node v
2386 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2387
2388 @kindex -v
2389 @kindex -version
2390 @cindex assembler version
2391 @cindex version of assembler
2392 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2393 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2394 command line.
2395
2396 @node W
2397 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2398
2399 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2400 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2401 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2402 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2403
2404 @kindex -W
2405 @kindex --no-warn
2406 @cindex suppressing warnings
2407 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2408 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2409 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2410 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2411 are still reported.
2412
2413 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2414 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2415 @cindex warnings, causing error
2416 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2417 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2418
2419 @kindex --warn
2420 @cindex warnings, switching on
2421 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2422 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2423
2424 @node Z
2425 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2426 @cindex object file, after errors
2427 @cindex errors, continuing after
2428 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2429 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2430 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2431 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2432 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2433 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2434
2435 @node Syntax
2436 @chapter Syntax
2437
2438 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2439 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2440 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2441 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2442 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2443 @ifclear VAX
2444 assembler.
2445 @end ifclear
2446 @ifset VAX
2447 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2448 @end ifset
2449
2450 @menu
2451 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2452 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2453 * Comments:: Comments
2454 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2455 * Statements:: Statements
2456 * Constants:: Constants
2457 @end menu
2458
2459 @node Preprocessing
2460 @section Preprocessing
2461
2462 @cindex preprocessing
2463 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2464 @itemize @bullet
2465 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2466 @item
2467 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2468 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2469 a single space.
2470
2471 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2472 @item
2473 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2474 appropriate number of newlines.
2475
2476 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2477 @item
2478 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2479 @end itemize
2480
2481 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2482 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2483 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2484 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2485 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2486 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2487 Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2488
2489 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2490 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2491 preprocessed.
2492
2493 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2494 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2495 @kindex #NO_APP
2496 @kindex #APP
2497 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2498 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2499 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2500 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2501 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2502 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2503 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2504 and whitespace.
2505
2506 @node Whitespace
2507 @section Whitespace
2508
2509 @cindex whitespace
2510 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2511 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2512 people to read. Unless within character constants
2513 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2514 as exactly one space.
2515
2516 @node Comments
2517 @section Comments
2518
2519 @cindex comments
2520 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2521 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2522
2523 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2524 This means you may not nest these comments.
2525
2526 @smallexample
2527 /*
2528 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2529 is to use this sort of comment.
2530 */
2531
2532 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2533 @end smallexample
2534
2535 @cindex line comment character
2536 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2537 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2538 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2539 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2540 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2541 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2542 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2543 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2544
2545 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2546 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2547 to specify logical line numbers:
2548
2549 @kindex #
2550 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2551 @cindex logical line numbers
2552 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2553 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2554 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2555 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2556 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2557
2558 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2559 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2560
2561 @smallexample
2562 # This is an ordinary comment.
2563 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2564 # This is logical line # 36.
2565 @end smallexample
2566 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2567 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2568
2569 @node Symbol Intro
2570 @section Symbols
2571
2572 @cindex characters used in symbols
2573 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2574 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2575 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2576 @samp{_.$}.
2577 @end ifclear
2578 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2579 @ifclear GENERIC
2580 @ifset H8
2581 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2582 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2583 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2584 symbol names.)
2585 @end ifset
2586 @end ifclear
2587 @end ifset
2588 @ifset GENERIC
2589 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2590 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2591 @end ifset
2592 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2593 There is no length limit: all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2594 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2595 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2596 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2597 @cindex length of symbols
2598
2599 @node Statements
2600 @section Statements
2601
2602 @cindex statements, structure of
2603 @cindex line separator character
2604 @cindex statement separator character
2605
2606 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2607 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2608 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2609 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2610 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2611 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2612 exception: they do not end statements.
2613
2614 @cindex newline, required at file end
2615 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2616 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2617 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2618
2619 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2620
2621 @cindex instructions and directives
2622 @cindex directives and instructions
2623 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2624 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2625 @c 13feb91.
2626 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2627 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2628 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2629 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2630 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2631 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2632 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2633 @ifset GENERIC
2634 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2635 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2636 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2637 language.@refill
2638 @end ifset
2639
2640 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2641 @cindex label (@code{:})
2642 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2643 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2644 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2645
2646 @ifset HPPA
2647 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2648 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2649 only one label may be defined on each line.
2650 @end ifset
2651
2652 @smallexample
2653 label: .directive followed by something
2654 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2655 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2656 @end smallexample
2657
2658 @node Constants
2659 @section Constants
2660
2661 @cindex constants
2662 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2663 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2664 @smallexample
2665 @group
2666 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2667 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2668 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2669 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2670 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2671 @end group
2672 @end smallexample
2673
2674 @menu
2675 * Characters:: Character Constants
2676 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2677 @end menu
2678
2679 @node Characters
2680 @subsection Character Constants
2681
2682 @cindex character constants
2683 @cindex constants, character
2684 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2685 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2686 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2687 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2688 used in arithmetic expressions.
2689
2690 @menu
2691 * Strings:: Strings
2692 * Chars:: Characters
2693 @end menu
2694
2695 @node Strings
2696 @subsubsection Strings
2697
2698 @cindex string constants
2699 @cindex constants, string
2700 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2701 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2702 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2703 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2704 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2705 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2706 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2707 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2708
2709 @cindex escape codes, character
2710 @cindex character escape codes
2711 @table @kbd
2712 @c @item \a
2713 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2714 @c
2715 @cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2716 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2717 @item \b
2718 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2719
2720 @c @item \e
2721 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2722 @c
2723 @cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2724 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2725 @item \f
2726 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2727
2728 @cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2729 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
2730 @item \n
2731 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2732
2733 @c @item \p
2734 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2735 @c
2736 @cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2737 @cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2738 @item \r
2739 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2740
2741 @c @item \s
2742 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
2743 @c other assemblers.
2744 @c
2745 @cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2746 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
2747 @item \t
2748 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2749
2750 @c @item \v
2751 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2752 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2753 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2754 @c
2755 @cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2756 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2757 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2758 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2759 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2760 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2761
2762 @cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2763 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2764 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2765 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
2766 lower case @code{x} works.
2767
2768 @cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2769 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2770 @item \\
2771 Represents one @samp{\} character.
2772
2773 @c @item \'
2774 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2775 @c This is needed in single character literals
2776 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2777 @c a @samp{'}.
2778 @c
2779 @cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2780 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2781 @item \"
2782 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
2783 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2784
2785 @item \ @var{anything-else}
2786 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2787 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
2788 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2789 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2790 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2791 code and warns you of the fact.
2792 @end table
2793
2794 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2795 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
2796 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2797 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2798 sequence.
2799
2800 @node Chars
2801 @subsubsection Characters
2802
2803 @cindex single character constant
2804 @cindex character, single
2805 @cindex constant, single character
2806 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2807 followed by that character. The same escapes apply to characters as
2808 to strings. So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2809 must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2810 @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2811 grave accent. A newline
2812 @ifclear GENERIC
2813 @ifclear abnormal-separator
2814 (or semicolon @samp{;})
2815 @end ifclear
2816 @ifset abnormal-separator
2817 @ifset H8
2818 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2819 Renesas SH)
2820 @end ifset
2821 @end ifset
2822 @end ifclear
2823 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2824 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
2825 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2826 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2827 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2828
2829 @node Numbers
2830 @subsection Number Constants
2831
2832 @cindex constants, number
2833 @cindex number constants
2834 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2835 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2836 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
2837 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
2838 are floating point numbers, described below.
2839
2840 @menu
2841 * Integers:: Integers
2842 * Bignums:: Bignums
2843 * Flonums:: Flonums
2844 @ifclear GENERIC
2845 @ifset I960
2846 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
2847 @end ifset
2848 @end ifclear
2849 @end menu
2850
2851 @node Integers
2852 @subsubsection Integers
2853 @cindex integers
2854 @cindex constants, integer
2855
2856 @cindex binary integers
2857 @cindex integers, binary
2858 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2859 the binary digits @samp{01}.
2860
2861 @cindex octal integers
2862 @cindex integers, octal
2863 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2864 digits (@samp{01234567}).
2865
2866 @cindex decimal integers
2867 @cindex integers, decimal
2868 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
2869 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
2870
2871 @cindex hexadecimal integers
2872 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
2873 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
2874 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
2875
2876 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
2877 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
2878 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
2879
2880 @node Bignums
2881 @subsubsection Bignums
2882
2883 @cindex bignums
2884 @cindex constants, bignum
2885 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
2886 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
2887 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
2888 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
2889
2890 @node Flonums
2891 @subsubsection Flonums
2892 @cindex flonums
2893 @cindex floating point numbers
2894 @cindex constants, floating point
2895
2896 @cindex precision, floating point
2897 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
2898 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
2899 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
2900 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
2901 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
2902 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
2903
2904 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
2905 @itemize @bullet
2906 @item
2907 The digit @samp{0}.
2908 @ifset HPPA
2909 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
2910 @end ifset
2911
2912 @item
2913 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
2914 @ifset GENERIC
2915 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
2916 @ignore
2917 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
2918 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
2919 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
2920 @end ignore
2921
2922 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
2923 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
2924 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2925
2926 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
2927 (in upper or lower case).
2928
2929 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
2930 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2931
2932 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
2933 @end ifset
2934 @ifclear GENERIC
2935 @ifset ARC
2936 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
2937 @end ifset
2938 @ifset H8
2939 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2940 @end ifset
2941 @ifset HPPA
2942 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
2943 @end ifset
2944 @ifset I960
2945 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2946 @end ifset
2947 @end ifclear
2948
2949 @item
2950 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2951
2952 @item
2953 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
2954
2955 @item
2956 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
2957 or more decimal digits.
2958
2959 @item
2960 An optional exponent, consisting of:
2961
2962 @itemize @bullet
2963 @item
2964 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
2965 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
2966 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
2967 @item
2968 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2969 @item
2970 One or more decimal digits.
2971 @end itemize
2972
2973 @end itemize
2974
2975 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
2976 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
2977
2978 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
2979 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
2980 @command{@value{AS}}.
2981
2982 @ifclear GENERIC
2983 @ifset I960
2984 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
2985 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
2986 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
2987 @node Bit Fields
2988 @subsubsection Bit Fields
2989
2990 @cindex bit fields
2991 @cindex constants, bit field
2992 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
2993 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
2994 @example
2995 @var{mask}:@var{value}
2996 @end example
2997 @noindent
2998 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
2999 @var{value}.
3000
3001 The resulting number is then packed
3002 @ifset GENERIC
3003 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3004 (in host-dependent byte order)
3005 @end ifset
3006 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3007 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3008 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3009 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3010 least significant digits.@refill
3011
3012 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3013 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3014 @end ifset
3015 @end ifclear
3016
3017 @node Sections
3018 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3019 @cindex sections
3020 @cindex relocation
3021
3022 @menu
3023 * Secs Background:: Background
3024 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3025 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3026 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3027 * bss:: bss Section
3028 @end menu
3029
3030 @node Secs Background
3031 @section Background
3032
3033 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3034 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3035 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3036
3037 @cindex linker, and assembler
3038 @cindex assembler, and linker
3039 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3040 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3041 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3042 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3043 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3044 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3045 sections.
3046
3047 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3048 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3049 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3050 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3051 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3052 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3053 the proper run-time addresses.
3054 @ifset H8
3055 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3056 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3057 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3058 @end ifset
3059
3060 @cindex standard assembler sections
3061 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3062 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3063 @dfn{bss} sections.
3064
3065 @ifset COFF-ELF
3066 @ifset GENERIC
3067 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3068 @end ifset
3069 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3070 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3071 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3072 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3073 @end ifset
3074
3075 @ifset HPPA
3076 @ifset GENERIC
3077 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3078 @end ifset
3079 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3080 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3081 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3082 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3083 assembler directives.
3084
3085 @ifset SOM
3086 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3087 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3088 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3089 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3090 @end ifset
3091 @end ifset
3092
3093 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3094 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3095
3096 @ifset HPPA
3097 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3098 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3099 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3100 @end ifset
3101
3102 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3103 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3104 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3105 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3106 file is mentioned:
3107 @itemize @bullet
3108 @item
3109 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3110 an address?
3111 @item
3112 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3113 @item
3114 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3115 @display
3116 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3117 @end display
3118 @item
3119 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3120 @end itemize
3121
3122 @cindex addresses, format of
3123 @cindex section-relative addressing
3124 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3125 @display
3126 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3127 @end display
3128 @noindent
3129 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3130 nature.
3131 @ifset SOM
3132 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3133 symbol-relative instead.)
3134 @end ifset
3135
3136 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3137 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3138
3139 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3140 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3141 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3142 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3143 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3144 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3145 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3146 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3147 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3148
3149 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3150 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3151 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3152 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3153 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3154 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3155 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3156
3157 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3158 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3159 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3160 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3161 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3162 data and bss sections.
3163
3164 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3165 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3166
3167 @node Ld Sections
3168 @section Linker Sections
3169 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3170
3171 @table @strong
3172
3173 @ifset COFF-ELF
3174 @cindex named sections
3175 @cindex sections, named
3176 @item named sections
3177 @end ifset
3178 @ifset aout-bout
3179 @cindex text section
3180 @cindex data section
3181 @itemx text section
3182 @itemx data section
3183 @end ifset
3184 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3185 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3186 true of another.
3187 @c @ifset aout-bout
3188 When the program is running, however, it is
3189 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3190 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3191 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3192 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3193 in the data section.
3194 @c @end ifset
3195
3196 @cindex bss section
3197 @item bss section
3198 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3199 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3200 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3201 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3202 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3203 those explicit zeros from object files.
3204
3205 @cindex absolute section
3206 @item absolute section
3207 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3208 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3209 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3210 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3211
3212 @cindex undefined section
3213 @item undefined section
3214 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3215 the preceding sections.
3216 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3217 @end table
3218
3219 @cindex relocation example
3220 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3221 @ifset COFF-ELF
3222 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3223 @end ifset
3224 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3225
3226 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3227 @ifnottex
3228 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3229 @smallexample
3230 +-----+----+--+
3231 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3232 +-----+----+--+
3233
3234 text data bss
3235 seg. seg. seg.
3236
3237 +---+---+---+
3238 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3239 +---+---+---+
3240
3241 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3242 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3243 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3244
3245 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3246 @end smallexample
3247 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3248 @end ifnottex
3249 @need 5000
3250 @tex
3251 \bigskip
3252 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3253 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3254 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3255
3256 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3257 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3258 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3259
3260 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3261 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3262 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3263 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3264 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3265
3266 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3267 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3268
3269 @end tex
3270 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3271
3272 @node As Sections
3273 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3274
3275 @cindex internal assembler sections
3276 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3277 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3278 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3279 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3280 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3281 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3282 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3283 section-relative address.
3284
3285 @table @b
3286 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3287 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3288 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3289 bug in the assembler.
3290
3291 @cindex expr (internal section)
3292 @item expr section
3293 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3294 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3295 it in the expr section.
3296 @c FIXME item debug
3297 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3298 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3299 @c FIXME item register
3300 @end table
3301
3302 @node Sub-Sections
3303 @section Sub-Sections
3304
3305 @cindex numbered subsections
3306 @cindex grouping data
3307 @ifset aout-bout
3308 Assembled bytes
3309 @ifset COFF-ELF
3310 conventionally
3311 @end ifset
3312 fall into two sections: text and data.
3313 @end ifset
3314 You may have separate groups of
3315 @ifset GENERIC
3316 data in named sections
3317 @end ifset
3318 @ifclear GENERIC
3319 @ifclear aout-bout
3320 data in named sections
3321 @end ifclear
3322 @ifset aout-bout
3323 text or data
3324 @end ifset
3325 @end ifclear
3326 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3327 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3328 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3329 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3330 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3331 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3332 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3333 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3334 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3335 constants being output.
3336
3337 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3338 goes in subsection number zero.
3339
3340 @ifset GENERIC
3341 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3342 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3343 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3344 @end ifset
3345 @ifclear GENERIC
3346 @ifset H8
3347 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3348 boundary (two bytes).
3349 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3350 @end ifset
3351 @ifset I960
3352 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3353 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3354 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3355 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3356 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3357 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3358 @end ifset
3359 @end ifclear
3360
3361 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3362 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3363 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3364 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3365 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3366 data subsections as a data section.
3367
3368 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3369 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3370 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3371 @ifset COFF
3372 @ifset GENERIC
3373 When generating COFF output, you
3374 @end ifset
3375 @ifclear GENERIC
3376 You
3377 @end ifclear
3378 can also use an extra subsection
3379 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3380 @var{expression}}.
3381 @end ifset
3382 @ifset ELF
3383 @ifset GENERIC
3384 When generating ELF output, you
3385 @end ifset
3386 @ifclear GENERIC
3387 You
3388 @end ifclear
3389 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3390 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3391 @end ifset
3392 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3393 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3394 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3395 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3396 @smallexample
3397 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3398 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3399 .text 1
3400 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3401 .data 0
3402 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3403 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3404 .text 0
3405 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3406 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3407 @end smallexample
3408
3409 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3410 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3411 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3412 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3413 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3414 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3415 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3416
3417 @node bss
3418 @section bss Section
3419
3420 @cindex bss section
3421 @cindex common variable storage
3422 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3423 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3424 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3425 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3426 section are zeroed bytes.
3427
3428 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3429 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3430
3431 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3432 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3433
3434 @ifset GENERIC
3435 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3436 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3437 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3438 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3439 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3440 @end ifset
3441
3442 @node Symbols
3443 @chapter Symbols
3444
3445 @cindex symbols
3446 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3447 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3448 to debug.
3449
3450 @quotation
3451 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3452 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3453 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3454 @end quotation
3455
3456 @menu
3457 * Labels:: Labels
3458 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3459 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3460 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3461 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3462 @end menu
3463
3464 @node Labels
3465 @section Labels
3466
3467 @cindex labels
3468 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3469 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3470 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3471 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3472 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3473 definitions.
3474
3475 @ifset HPPA
3476 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3477 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3478 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3479 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3480 @end ifset
3481
3482 @node Setting Symbols
3483 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3484
3485 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3486 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3487 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3488 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3489 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3490 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3491 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3492 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3493
3494 @ifset Blackfin
3495 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3496 @end ifset
3497
3498 @node Symbol Names
3499 @section Symbol Names
3500
3501 @cindex symbol names
3502 @cindex names, symbol
3503 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3504 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3505 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3506 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3507 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3508 particular target machine), and underscores.
3509 @end ifclear
3510 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3511 @ifset H8
3512 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3513 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3514 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3515 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3516 @end ifset
3517 @end ifset
3518
3519 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3520 than @code{Foo}.
3521
3522 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3523 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3524 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3525 currently supported.
3526
3527 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3528 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3529 in a program.
3530
3531 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3532
3533 @cindex local symbol names
3534 @cindex symbol names, local
3535 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3536 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3537 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3538 set of local label prefixes.
3539 @ifset HPPA
3540 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3541 @end ifset
3542
3543 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3544 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3545 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols:
3546 @option{-L}}) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3547
3548 @subheading Local Labels
3549
3550 @cindex local labels
3551 @cindex temporary symbol names
3552 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3553 Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.
3554 They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of
3555 the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation.
3556 To define a local label, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N}
3557 represents any positive integer). To refer to the most recent previous
3558 definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when
3559 you defined the label. To refer to the next definition of a local label, write
3560 @samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands
3561 for ``forwards''.
3562
3563 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3564 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3565 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3566 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3567 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3568 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3569 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3570
3571 Here is an example:
3572
3573 @smallexample
3574 1: branch 1f
3575 2: branch 1b
3576 1: branch 2f
3577 2: branch 1b
3578 @end smallexample
3579
3580 Which is the equivalent of:
3581
3582 @smallexample
3583 label_1: branch label_3
3584 label_2: branch label_1
3585 label_3: branch label_4
3586 label_4: branch label_3
3587 @end smallexample
3588
3589 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3590 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3591 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3592 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3593 these parts:
3594
3595 @table @code
3596 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3597 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3598 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3599 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3600 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3601 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3602 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3603 you may use them in debugging.
3604
3605 @item @var{number}
3606 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3607 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3608
3609 @item @kbd{C-B}
3610 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3611 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3612
3613 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3614 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3615 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3616 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3617 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3618 @end table
3619
3620 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3621 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3622
3623 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3624 @cindex dollar local symbols
3625
3626 @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called
3627 dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
3628 soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain valid for only a small
3629 region of the input source code. Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in
3630 scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of
3631 the same local label.
3632
3633 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3634 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3635 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3636
3637 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3638 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3639 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3640 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3641
3642 @node Dot
3643 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3644
3645 @cindex dot (symbol)
3646 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3647 @cindex current address
3648 @cindex location counter
3649 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3650 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3651 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3652 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3653 directive.
3654 @ifclear no-space-dir
3655 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3656 @samp{.space 4}.
3657 @end ifclear
3658
3659 @node Symbol Attributes
3660 @section Symbol Attributes
3661
3662 @cindex symbol attributes
3663 @cindex attributes, symbol
3664 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3665 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3666 attributes.
3667 @ifset INTERNALS
3668 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3669 @end ifset
3670
3671 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3672 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3673 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3674 would want.
3675
3676 @menu
3677 * Symbol Value:: Value
3678 * Symbol Type:: Type
3679 @ifset aout-bout
3680 @ifset GENERIC
3681 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3682 @end ifset
3683 @ifclear GENERIC
3684 @ifclear BOUT
3685 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3686 @end ifclear
3687 @ifset BOUT
3688 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3689 @end ifset
3690 @end ifclear
3691 @end ifset
3692 @ifset COFF
3693 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3694 @end ifset
3695 @ifset SOM
3696 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3697 @end ifset
3698 @end menu
3699
3700 @node Symbol Value
3701 @subsection Value
3702
3703 @cindex value of a symbol
3704 @cindex symbol value
3705 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3706 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3707 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3708 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3709 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
3710 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3711 called absolute.
3712
3713 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
3714 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
3715 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3716 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3717 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3718 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3719 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
3720 allocated storage.
3721
3722 @node Symbol Type
3723 @subsection Type
3724
3725 @cindex type of a symbol
3726 @cindex symbol type
3727 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3728 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3729 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
3730 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3731
3732 @ifset aout-bout
3733 @ifclear GENERIC
3734 @ifset BOUT
3735 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
3736 @c better if it were available outside examples.
3737 @need 1000
3738 @node a.out Symbols
3739 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3740
3741 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3742 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3743 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3744 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3745 @code{b.out}.
3746
3747 @end ifset
3748 @ifclear BOUT
3749 @node a.out Symbols
3750 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3751
3752 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3753 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3754
3755 @end ifclear
3756 @end ifclear
3757 @ifset GENERIC
3758 @node a.out Symbols
3759 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3760
3761 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3762 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3763
3764 @end ifset
3765 @menu
3766 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
3767 * Symbol Other:: Other
3768 @end menu
3769
3770 @node Symbol Desc
3771 @subsubsection Descriptor
3772
3773 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3774 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
3775 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3776 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
3777 @command{@value{AS}}.
3778
3779 @node Symbol Other
3780 @subsubsection Other
3781
3782 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3783 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3784 @end ifset
3785
3786 @ifset COFF
3787 @node COFF Symbols
3788 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3789
3790 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
3791 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3792
3793 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3794 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3795 @code{.endef} directives.
3796
3797 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
3798
3799 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3800 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3801 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3802
3803 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3804
3805 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3806 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3807 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3808 table information for COFF.
3809 @end ifset
3810
3811 @ifset SOM
3812 @node SOM Symbols
3813 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3814
3815 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
3816 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3817
3818 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3819 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3820
3821 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3822 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3823 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3824 @end ifset
3825
3826 @node Expressions
3827 @chapter Expressions
3828
3829 @cindex expressions
3830 @cindex addresses
3831 @cindex numeric values
3832 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3833 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3834
3835 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3836 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3837 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3838 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3839 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3840 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3841
3842 @menu
3843 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
3844 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
3845 @end menu
3846
3847 @node Empty Exprs
3848 @section Empty Expressions
3849
3850 @cindex empty expressions
3851 @cindex expressions, empty
3852 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3853 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3854 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
3855 is compatible with other assemblers.
3856
3857 @node Integer Exprs
3858 @section Integer Expressions
3859
3860 @cindex integer expressions
3861 @cindex expressions, integer
3862 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
3863 by @emph{operators}.
3864
3865 @menu
3866 * Arguments:: Arguments
3867 * Operators:: Operators
3868 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
3869 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
3870 @end menu
3871
3872 @node Arguments
3873 @subsection Arguments
3874
3875 @cindex expression arguments
3876 @cindex arguments in expressions
3877 @cindex operands in expressions
3878 @cindex arithmetic operands
3879 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
3880 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
3881 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
3882 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
3883 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
3884 instruction operands.
3885
3886 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
3887 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
3888 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
3889 integer.
3890
3891 Numbers are usually integers.
3892
3893 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
3894 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
3895 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
3896 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
3897 assemblers.
3898
3899 @cindex subexpressions
3900 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
3901 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
3902 operator followed by an argument.
3903
3904 @node Operators
3905 @subsection Operators
3906
3907 @cindex operators, in expressions
3908 @cindex arithmetic functions
3909 @cindex functions, in expressions
3910 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
3911 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
3912 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
3913 whitespace.
3914
3915 @node Prefix Ops
3916 @subsection Prefix Operator
3917
3918 @cindex prefix operators
3919 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
3920 one argument, which must be absolute.
3921
3922 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
3923 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
3924 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
3925 @tex
3926 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3927 @end tex
3928
3929 @table @code
3930 @item -
3931 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
3932 @item ~
3933 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
3934 @end table
3935
3936 @tex
3937 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
3938 @end tex
3939
3940 @node Infix Ops
3941 @subsection Infix Operators
3942
3943 @cindex infix operators
3944 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
3945 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
3946 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
3947 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
3948 absolute, and the result is absolute.
3949
3950 @enumerate
3951 @cindex operator precedence
3952 @cindex precedence of operators
3953
3954 @item
3955 Highest Precedence
3956
3957 @table @code
3958 @item *
3959 @dfn{Multiplication}.
3960
3961 @item /
3962 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
3963
3964 @item %
3965 @dfn{Remainder}.
3966
3967 @item <<
3968 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
3969
3970 @item >>
3971 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
3972 @end table
3973
3974 @item
3975 Intermediate precedence
3976
3977 @table @code
3978 @item |
3979
3980 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
3981
3982 @item &
3983 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
3984
3985 @item ^
3986 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
3987
3988 @item !
3989 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
3990 @end table
3991
3992 @item
3993 Low Precedence
3994
3995 @table @code
3996 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
3997 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
3998 @cindex arguments for addition
3999 @item +
4000 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4001 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4002 sections.
4003
4004 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4005 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4006 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4007 @item -
4008 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4009 result has the section of the left argument.
4010 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4011 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4012 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4013
4014 @cindex comparison expressions
4015 @cindex expressions, comparison
4016 @item ==
4017 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4018 @item <>
4019 @itemx !=
4020 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4021 @item <
4022 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4023 @item >
4024 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4025 @item >=
4026 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4027 @item <=
4028 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4029
4030 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4031 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4032 perform signed comparisons.
4033 @end table
4034
4035 @item Lowest Precedence
4036
4037 @table @code
4038 @item &&
4039 @dfn{Logical And}.
4040
4041 @item ||
4042 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4043
4044 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4045 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4046 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4047 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4048
4049 @end table
4050 @end enumerate
4051
4052 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4053 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4054
4055 @node Pseudo Ops
4056 @chapter Assembler Directives
4057
4058 @cindex directives, machine independent
4059 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4060 @cindex machine independent directives
4061 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4062 The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
4063
4064 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4065 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4066 @ifset GENERIC
4067 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4068 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4069 @end ifset
4070 @ifclear GENERIC
4071 @ifset machine-directives
4072 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4073 @end ifset
4074 @end ifclear
4075
4076 @menu
4077 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4078 @ifset COFF
4079 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4080 @end ifset
4081
4082 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4083 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4084 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4085 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4086 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4087 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, @code{.bundle_lock}, @code{.bundle_unlock}
4088 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4089 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4090 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4091 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4092 @ifset COFF
4093 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4094 @end ifset
4095 @ifset aout-bout
4096 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4097 @end ifset
4098 @ifset COFF
4099 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4100 @end ifset
4101
4102 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4103 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4104 * Else:: @code{.else}
4105 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4106 * End:: @code{.end}
4107 @ifset COFF
4108 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4109 @end ifset
4110
4111 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4112 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4113 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4114 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4115 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4116 * Err:: @code{.err}
4117 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4118 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4119 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4120 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4121 * File:: @code{.file}
4122 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4123 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4124 * Func:: @code{.func}
4125 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4126 @ifset ELF
4127 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4128 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4129 @end ifset
4130
4131 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4132 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4133 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4134 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4135 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4136 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4137 @ifset ELF
4138 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4139 @end ifset
4140
4141 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4142 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4143 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4144 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4145 @ifclear no-line-dir
4146 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4147 @end ifclear
4148
4149 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4150 * List:: @code{.list}
4151 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4152 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4153 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4154 @ifset ELF
4155 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4156 @end ifset
4157
4158 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4159 @ignore
4160 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4161 @end ignore
4162
4163 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4164 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4165 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4166 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4167 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4168 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4169 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4170 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4171 @ifset ELF
4172 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4173 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4174 @end ifset
4175
4176 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4177 @ifset ELF
4178 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4179 @end ifset
4180
4181 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4182 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4183 @ifset ELF
4184 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4185 @end ifset
4186
4187 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4188 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4189 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4190 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4191 @ifset COFF
4192 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4193 @end ifset
4194 @ifset COFF-ELF
4195 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4196 @end ifset
4197
4198 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4199 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4200 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4201 @ifset COFF-ELF
4202 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4203 @end ifset
4204 @ifclear no-space-dir
4205 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4206 @end ifclear
4207
4208 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4209 @ifclear no-space-dir
4210 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4211 @end ifclear
4212 @ifset have-stabs
4213 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4214 @end ifset
4215
4216 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4217 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4218 @ifset ELF
4219 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4220 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4221 @end ifset
4222
4223 @ifset COFF
4224 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4225 @end ifset
4226
4227 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4228 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4229 @ifset COFF-ELF
4230 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4231 @end ifset
4232
4233 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4234 @ifset COFF
4235 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4236 @end ifset
4237
4238 @ifset ELF
4239 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4240 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4241 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4242 @end ifset
4243
4244 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4245 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4246 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4247 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4248 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4249 @end menu
4250
4251 @node Abort
4252 @section @code{.abort}
4253
4254 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4255 @cindex stopping the assembly
4256 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4257 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4258 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4259 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4260 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4261
4262 @ifset COFF
4263 @node ABORT (COFF)
4264 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4265
4266 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4267 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4268 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4269
4270 @ifset BOUT
4271 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4272 but ignores it.
4273 @end ifset
4274 @end ifset
4275
4276 @node Align
4277 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4278
4279 @cindex padding the location counter
4280 @cindex @code{align} directive
4281 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4282 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4283 required, as described below.
4284
4285 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4286 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4287 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4288 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4289 with no-op instructions.
4290
4291 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4292 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4293 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4294 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4295 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4296 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4297 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4298
4299 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4300 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or32,
4301 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4302 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4303 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4304 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4305 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4306
4307 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4308 strongarm, it is the
4309 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4310 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4311 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4312 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4313
4314 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4315 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4316 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4317 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4318 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4319
4320 @node Altmacro
4321 @section @code{.altmacro}
4322 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4323
4324 @ftable @code
4325 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4326 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4327 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4328 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4329 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4330 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4331 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4332
4333 @item String delimiters
4334 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4335 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4336
4337 @table @code
4338 @item '@var{string}'
4339 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4340
4341 @item <@var{string}>
4342 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4343 @end table
4344
4345 @item single-character string escape
4346 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4347 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4348 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4349 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4350
4351 @item Expression results as strings
4352 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4353 and use the result as a string.
4354 @end ftable
4355
4356 @node Ascii
4357 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4358
4359 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4360 @cindex string literals
4361 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4362 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4363 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4364
4365 @node Asciz
4366 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4367
4368 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4369 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4370 @cindex null-terminated strings
4371 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4372 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4373
4374 @node Balign
4375 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4376
4377 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4378 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4379 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4380 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4381 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4382 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4383 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4384
4385 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4386 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4387 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4388 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4389 with no-op instructions.
4390
4391 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4392 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4393 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4394 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4395 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4396 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4397 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4398
4399 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4400 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4401 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4402 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4403 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4404 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4405 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4406 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4407 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4408 undefined.
4409
4410 @node Bundle directives
4411 @section @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4412 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4413 @cindex bundle
4414 @cindex instruction bundle
4415 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4416 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4417 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4418 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4419 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4420 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4421 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4422
4423 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4424 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4425 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4426 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4427 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4428 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4429 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4430 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4431 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4432 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4433 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4434
4435 @section @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4436 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4437 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4438 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4439 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4440 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4441 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4442 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4443 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4444
4445 @cindex bundle-locked
4446 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4447 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4448 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4449 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4450 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4451 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4452 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4453 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4454 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4455 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4456 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4457 bundle size.
4458
4459 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4460 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4461 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4462 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4463 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4464 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4465
4466 @node Byte
4467 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4468
4469 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4470 @cindex integers, one byte
4471 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4472 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4473
4474 @node CFI directives
4475 @section @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4476 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4477 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4478 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4479 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4480 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4481 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4482 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4483
4484 @section @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4485 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4486 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4487 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4488 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4489 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4490
4491 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4492 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4493
4494 @section @code{.cfi_endproc}
4495 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4496 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4497 unwind entry previously opened by
4498 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4499
4500 @section @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4501 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4502 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4503 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4504 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4505 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4506 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4507 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4508 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4509 no personality routine.
4510
4511 @section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4512 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4513 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4514 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4515 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be a constant
4516 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4517 no LSDA.
4518
4519 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4520 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4521 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4522
4523 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4524 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4525 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4526 remains the same.
4527
4528 @section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4529 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4530 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4531 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4532 CFA address.
4533
4534 @section @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4535 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4536 value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4537
4538 @section @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4539 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4540 CFA.
4541
4542 @section @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4543 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4544 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4545 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4546 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4547 code it's annotating.
4548
4549 @section @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4550 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4551
4552 @section @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4553 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4554 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4555 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4556
4557 @section @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4558 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4559
4560 @section @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4561 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4562 i.e. no restoration needed.
4563
4564 @section @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4565 First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4566 then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4567 everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4568 the previous saved state.
4569
4570 @section @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4571 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4572 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4573
4574 @section @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4575 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4576
4577 @section @code{.cfi_window_save}
4578 SPARC register window has been saved.
4579
4580 @section @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4581 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4582 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4583 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4584
4585 @section @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4586 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4587 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4588 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4589
4590 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4591 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4592 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4593 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4594 or another register.
4595
4596 @node Comm
4597 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4598
4599 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4600 @cindex symbol, common
4601 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4602 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4603 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4604 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4605 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4606 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4607 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4608 using the largest size.
4609
4610 @ifset COFF-ELF
4611 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4612 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4613 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4614 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4615 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4616 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4617 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4618 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
4619 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4620 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4621 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4622 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4623 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4624 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4625 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4626 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4627 @end ifset
4628
4629 @ifset HPPA
4630 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
4631 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4632 @end ifset
4633
4634 @node Data
4635 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4636
4637 @cindex @code{data} directive
4638 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4639 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4640 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4641 to zero.
4642
4643 @ifset COFF
4644 @node Def
4645 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
4646
4647 @cindex @code{def} directive
4648 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4649 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
4650 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4651 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4652 @ifset BOUT
4653
4654 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4655 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4656 but ignored.
4657 @end ifset
4658 @end ifset
4659
4660 @ifset aout-bout
4661 @node Desc
4662 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4663
4664 @cindex @code{desc} directive
4665 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4666 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4667 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4668 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4669
4670 @ifset COFF
4671 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4672 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4673 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4674 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4675 @end ifset
4676 @end ifset
4677
4678 @ifset COFF
4679 @node Dim
4680 @section @code{.dim}
4681
4682 @cindex @code{dim} directive
4683 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4684 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4685 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4686 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
4687 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4688 @ifset BOUT
4689
4690 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4691 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4692 ignores it.
4693 @end ifset
4694 @end ifset
4695
4696 @node Double
4697 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4698
4699 @cindex @code{double} directive
4700 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
4701 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4702 assembles floating point numbers.
4703 @ifset GENERIC
4704 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4705 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4706 @end ifset
4707 @ifclear GENERIC
4708 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4709 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4710 in @sc{ieee} format.
4711 @end ifset
4712 @end ifclear
4713
4714 @node Eject
4715 @section @code{.eject}
4716
4717 @cindex @code{eject} directive
4718 @cindex new page, in listings
4719 @cindex page, in listings
4720 @cindex listing control: new page
4721 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4722
4723 @node Else
4724 @section @code{.else}
4725
4726 @cindex @code{else} directive
4727 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4728 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
4729 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4730 was false.
4731
4732 @node Elseif
4733 @section @code{.elseif}
4734
4735 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
4736 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4737 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
4738 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4739
4740 @node End
4741 @section @code{.end}
4742
4743 @cindex @code{end} directive
4744 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
4745 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4746
4747 @ifset COFF
4748 @node Endef
4749 @section @code{.endef}
4750
4751 @cindex @code{endef} directive
4752 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4753 @code{.def}.
4754 @ifset BOUT
4755
4756 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4757 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4758 directive but ignores it.
4759 @end ifset
4760 @end ifset
4761
4762 @node Endfunc
4763 @section @code{.endfunc}
4764 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4765 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4766
4767 @node Endif
4768 @section @code{.endif}
4769
4770 @cindex @code{endif} directive
4771 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4772 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4773 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4774
4775 @node Equ
4776 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4777
4778 @cindex @code{equ} directive
4779 @cindex assigning values to symbols
4780 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
4781 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4782 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4783
4784 @ifset HPPA
4785 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4786 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4787 @end ifset
4788
4789 @ifset Z80
4790 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4791 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4792 On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4793 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4794 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4795 @end ifset
4796
4797 @node Equiv
4798 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4799 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
4800 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4801 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
4802 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4803 undefined.
4804
4805 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4806 @smallexample
4807 .ifdef SYM
4808 .err
4809 .endif
4810 .equ SYM,VAL
4811 @end smallexample
4812 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4813
4814 @node Eqv
4815 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4816 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
4817 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4818 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
4819 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
4820 value is taken.
4821
4822 @node Err
4823 @section @code{.err}
4824 @cindex @code{err} directive
4825 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
4826 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
4827 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
4828
4829 @node Error
4830 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
4831 @cindex error directive
4832
4833 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
4834 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
4835 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
4836 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
4837
4838 @smallexample
4839 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
4840 @end smallexample
4841
4842 @node Exitm
4843 @section @code{.exitm}
4844 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
4845
4846 @node Extern
4847 @section @code{.extern}
4848
4849 @cindex @code{extern} directive
4850 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
4851 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
4852 all undefined symbols as external.
4853
4854 @node Fail
4855 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
4856
4857 @cindex @code{fail} directive
4858 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
4859 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
4860 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
4861 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
4862 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
4863
4864 @node File
4865 @section @code{.file}
4866 @cindex @code{file} directive
4867
4868 @ifclear no-file-dir
4869 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
4870 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
4871 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
4872
4873 @subheading Default Version
4874
4875 @cindex logical file name
4876 @cindex file name, logical
4877 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
4878 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
4879
4880 @smallexample
4881 .file @var{string}
4882 @end smallexample
4883
4884 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
4885 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
4886 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
4887 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
4888 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
4889
4890 @subheading DWARF2 Version
4891 @end ifclear
4892
4893 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
4894 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
4895
4896 @smallexample
4897 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
4898 @end smallexample
4899
4900 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
4901 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
4902 literal.
4903
4904 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
4905 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
4906 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
4907 entries will have.
4908
4909 @node Fill
4910 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4911
4912 @cindex @code{fill} directive
4913 @cindex writing patterns in memory
4914 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
4915 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
4916 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
4917 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
4918 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
4919 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
4920 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
4921 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
4922 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
4923 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
4924 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
4925 compatible with other people's assemblers.
4926
4927 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
4928 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
4929 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
4930 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
4931
4932 @node Float
4933 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4934
4935 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
4936 @cindex @code{float} directive
4937 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
4938 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
4939 @ifset GENERIC
4940 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4941 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
4942 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4943 @end ifset
4944 @ifclear GENERIC
4945 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
4946 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
4947 in @sc{ieee} format.
4948 @end ifset
4949 @end ifclear
4950
4951 @node Func
4952 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
4953 @cindex @code{func} directive
4954 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
4955 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
4956 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
4957 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
4958 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
4959 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
4960 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
4961 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
4962
4963 @node Global
4964 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4965
4966 @cindex @code{global} directive
4967 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
4968 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
4969 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
4970 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
4971 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
4972 from another file linked into the same program.
4973
4974 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
4975 compatibility with other assemblers.
4976
4977 @ifset HPPA
4978 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
4979 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
4980 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
4981 @end ifset
4982
4983 @ifset ELF
4984 @node Gnu_attribute
4985 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4986 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
4987
4988 @node Hidden
4989 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4990
4991 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
4992 @cindex visibility
4993 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
4994 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
4995 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
4996
4997 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
4998 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
4999 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5000 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5001 @end ifset
5002
5003 @node hword
5004 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5005
5006 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5007 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5008 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5009 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5010 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5011 a 16 bit number for each.
5012
5013 @ifset GENERIC
5014 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5015 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5016 @end ifset
5017 @ifclear GENERIC
5018 @ifset W32
5019 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5020 @end ifset
5021 @ifset W16
5022 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5023 @end ifset
5024 @end ifclear
5025
5026 @node Ident
5027 @section @code{.ident}
5028
5029 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5030
5031 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5032 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5033 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5034 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5035 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5036 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5037 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5038
5039 @node If
5040 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5041
5042 @cindex conditional assembly
5043 @cindex @code{if} directive
5044 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5045 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5046 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5047 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5048 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5049 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5050 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5051 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5052
5053 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5054 @table @code
5055 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5056 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5057 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5058 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5059 is considered to be undefined.
5060
5061 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5062 @item .ifb @var{text}
5063 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5064
5065 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5066 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5067 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5068 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5069 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5070 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5071 string comparison is case sensitive.
5072
5073 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5074 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5075 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5076
5077 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5078 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5079 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5080
5081 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5082 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5083 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5084 equal to zero.
5085
5086 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5087 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5088 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5089
5090 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5091 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5092 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5093 to zero.
5094
5095 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5096 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5097 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5098
5099 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5100 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5101 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5102 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5103
5104 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5105 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5106 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5107 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5108
5109 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5110 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5111 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5112 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5113 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5114 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5115 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5116
5117 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5118 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5119 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5120 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5121
5122 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5123 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5124 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5125 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5126 @end table
5127
5128 @node Incbin
5129 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5130
5131 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5132 @cindex binary files, including
5133 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5134 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5135 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5136 around @var{file}.
5137
5138 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5139 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5140 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5141 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5142 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5143
5144 @node Include
5145 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5146
5147 @cindex @code{include} directive
5148 @cindex supporting files, including
5149 @cindex files, including
5150 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5151 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5152 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5153 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5154 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5155 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5156 around @var{file}.
5157
5158 @node Int
5159 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5160
5161 @cindex @code{int} directive
5162 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5163 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5164 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5165 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5166 of target the assembly is for.
5167
5168 @ifclear GENERIC
5169 @ifset H8
5170 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5171 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5172 32-bit integers.
5173 @end ifset
5174 @end ifclear
5175
5176 @ifset ELF
5177 @node Internal
5178 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5179
5180 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5181 @cindex visibility
5182 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5183 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5184 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5185
5186 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5187 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5188 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5189 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5190 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5191 @end ifset
5192
5193 @node Irp
5194 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5195
5196 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5197 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5198 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5199 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5200 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5201 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5202 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5203 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5204
5205 For example, assembling
5206
5207 @example
5208 .irp param,1,2,3
5209 move d\param,sp@@-
5210 .endr
5211 @end example
5212
5213 is equivalent to assembling
5214
5215 @example
5216 move d1,sp@@-
5217 move d2,sp@@-
5218 move d3,sp@@-
5219 @end example
5220
5221 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5222
5223 @node Irpc
5224 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5225
5226 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5227 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5228 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5229 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5230 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5231 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5232 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5233 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5234
5235 For example, assembling
5236
5237 @example
5238 .irpc param,123
5239 move d\param,sp@@-
5240 .endr
5241 @end example
5242
5243 is equivalent to assembling
5244
5245 @example
5246 move d1,sp@@-
5247 move d2,sp@@-
5248 move d3,sp@@-
5249 @end example
5250
5251 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5252 at @xref{Macro}.
5253
5254 @node Lcomm
5255 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5256
5257 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5258 @cindex local common symbols
5259 @cindex symbols, local common
5260 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5261 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5262 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5263 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5264 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5265 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5266
5267 @ifset GENERIC
5268 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5269 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5270 @end ifset
5271
5272 @ifset HPPA
5273 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5274 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5275 @end ifset
5276
5277 @node Lflags
5278 @section @code{.lflags}
5279
5280 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5281 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5282 assemblers, but ignores it.
5283
5284 @ifclear no-line-dir
5285 @node Line
5286 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5287
5288 @cindex @code{line} directive
5289 @cindex logical line number
5290 @ifset aout-bout
5291 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5292 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5293 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5294 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5295 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5296 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5297 @end ifset
5298
5299 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5300 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5301 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5302 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5303 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5304
5305 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5306 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5307 debugging.
5308 @end ifclear
5309
5310 @node Linkonce
5311 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5312 @cindex COMDAT
5313 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5314 @cindex common sections
5315 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5316 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5317 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5318 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5319 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5320 unique.
5321
5322 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5323 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5324 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5325
5326 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5327 following strings. For example:
5328 @smallexample
5329 .linkonce same_size
5330 @end smallexample
5331 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5332
5333 @table @code
5334 @item discard
5335 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5336
5337 @item one_only
5338 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5339
5340 @item same_size
5341 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5342
5343 @item same_contents
5344 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5345 @end table
5346
5347 @node List
5348 @section @code{.list}
5349
5350 @cindex @code{list} directive
5351 @cindex listing control, turning on
5352 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5353 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5354 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5355 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5356 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5357
5358 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5359 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5360 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5361
5362 @node Ln
5363 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5364
5365 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5366 @ifclear no-line-dir
5367 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5368 @end ifclear
5369 @ifset no-line-dir
5370 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5371 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5372 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5373 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5374 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5375 @ifset BOUT
5376
5377 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5378 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5379 output format.
5380 @end ifset
5381 @end ifset
5382
5383 @node Loc
5384 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5385 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5386 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5387 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5388 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5389 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5390 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5391 the row is added.
5392
5393 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5394
5395 @table @code
5396 @item basic_block
5397 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5398 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5399
5400 @item prologue_end
5401 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5402 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5403
5404 @item epilogue_begin
5405 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5406 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5407
5408 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5409 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5410 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5411 either 0 or 1.
5412
5413 @item isa @var{value}
5414 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5415 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5416
5417 @item discriminator @var{value}
5418 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5419 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5420
5421 @end table
5422
5423 @node Loc_mark_labels
5424 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5425 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5426 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5427 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5428 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5429 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5430 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5431 this function respectively.
5432
5433 @ifset ELF
5434 @node Local
5435 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5436
5437 @cindex @code{local} directive
5438 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5439 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5440 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5441 they will be created.
5442
5443 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5444 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5445 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5446 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5447 @end ifset
5448
5449 @node Long
5450 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5451
5452 @cindex @code{long} directive
5453 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5454
5455 @ignore
5456 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5457 @c what it really ought to do
5458 @node Lsym
5459 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5460
5461 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5462 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5463 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5464 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5465 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5466 the same as the expression value:
5467 @smallexample
5468 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5469 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5470 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5471 @end smallexample
5472 @noindent
5473 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5474 @end ignore
5475
5476 @node Macro
5477 @section @code{.macro}
5478
5479 @cindex macros
5480 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5481 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5482 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5483
5484 @example
5485 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5486 .long \from
5487 .if \to-\from
5488 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5489 .endif
5490 .endm
5491 @end example
5492
5493 @noindent
5494 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5495
5496 @example
5497 .long 0
5498 .long 1
5499 .long 2
5500 .long 3
5501 .long 4
5502 .long 5
5503 @end example
5504
5505 @ftable @code
5506 @item .macro @var{macname}
5507 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5508 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5509 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5510 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5511 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5512 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5513 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5514 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5515 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5516 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5517 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5518 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5519
5520 @table @code
5521 @item .macro comm
5522 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5523 arguments.
5524
5525 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5526 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5527 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5528 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5529 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5530
5531 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5532 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5533 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5534 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5535 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5536 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5537 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5538 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5539
5540 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5541 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5542 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5543 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5544 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5545
5546 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5547 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5548 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5549
5550 @end table
5551
5552 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5553 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5554 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5555 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5556 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5557 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5558 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5559 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5560 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5561 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5562 this macro definition:
5563
5564 @example
5565 .macro label l
5566 \l:
5567 .endm
5568 @end example
5569
5570 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5571 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5572 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5573 identifier.
5574
5575 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5576 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5577 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5578 length specifier like this:
5579
5580 @example
5581 .macro opcode base length
5582 \base.\length
5583 .endm
5584 @end example
5585
5586 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5587 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5588 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5589
5590 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5591
5592 @table @code
5593 @item Insert white space
5594 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5595 solution. eg:
5596
5597 @example
5598 .macro label l
5599 \l :
5600 .endm
5601 @end example
5602
5603 @item Use @samp{\()}
5604 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5605 the following text. eg:
5606
5607 @example
5608 .macro opcode base length
5609 \base\().\length
5610 .endm
5611 @end example
5612
5613 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5614 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5615 used as a separator. eg:
5616
5617 @example
5618 .altmacro
5619 .macro label l
5620 l&:
5621 .endm
5622 @end example
5623 @end table
5624
5625 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5626 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5627 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5628
5629 @item .endm
5630 @cindex @code{endm} directive
5631 Mark the end of a macro definition.
5632
5633 @item .exitm
5634 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
5635 Exit early from the current macro definition.
5636
5637 @cindex number of macros executed
5638 @cindex macros, count executed
5639 @item \@@
5640 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5641 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5642 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5643
5644 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5645 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5646 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5647 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5648 @end ftable
5649
5650 @node MRI
5651 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5652
5653 @cindex @code{mri} directive
5654 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5655 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
5656 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
5657 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5658 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5659
5660 @node Noaltmacro
5661 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
5662 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
5663
5664 @node Nolist
5665 @section @code{.nolist}
5666
5667 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
5668 @cindex listing control, turning off
5669 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5670 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5671 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5672 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5673 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5674
5675 @node Octa
5676 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5677
5678 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
5679 @cindex @code{octa} directive
5680 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5681 @cindex sixteen byte integer
5682 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
5683 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5684
5685 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5686 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5687
5688 @node Offset
5689 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
5690
5691 @cindex @code{offset} directive
5692 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
5693 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
5694 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
5695 directive.
5696
5697 @node Org
5698 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5699
5700 @cindex @code{org} directive
5701 @cindex location counter, advancing
5702 @cindex advancing location counter
5703 @cindex current address, advancing
5704 Advance the location counter of the current section to
5705 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5706 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
5707 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5708 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
5709 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5710 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5711 is the same as the current subsection.
5712
5713 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5714 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5715 backwards.
5716
5717 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5718 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5719 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5720 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5721 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5722 a chance to share your improved assembler.
5723
5724 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5725 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
5726 people's assemblers.
5727
5728 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5729 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5730 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5731 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
5732
5733 @node P2align
5734 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5735
5736 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5737 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
5738 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5739 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5740 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5741 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5742 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
5743 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5744
5745 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5746 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
5747 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
5748 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5749 with no-op instructions.
5750
5751 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
5752 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5753 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5754 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
5755 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5756 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5757 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5758
5759 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5760 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5761 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5762 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5763 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5764 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
5765 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
5766 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5767 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5768 undefined.
5769
5770 @ifset ELF
5771 @node PopSection
5772 @section @code{.popsection}
5773
5774 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
5775 @cindex Section Stack
5776 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5777 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5778 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5779 (@pxref{Previous}).
5780
5781 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5782 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
5783 stack.
5784 @end ifset
5785
5786 @ifset ELF
5787 @node Previous
5788 @section @code{.previous}
5789
5790 @cindex @code{previous} directive
5791 @cindex Section Stack
5792 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5793 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5794 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5795 (@pxref{PopSection}).
5796
5797 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5798 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
5799 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5800 subsections). For example:
5801
5802 @smallexample
5803 .section A
5804 .subsection 1
5805 .word 0x1234
5806 .subsection 2
5807 .word 0x5678
5808 .previous
5809 .word 0x9abc
5810 @end smallexample
5811
5812 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5813 section A. Whilst:
5814
5815 @smallexample
5816 .section A
5817 .subsection 1
5818 # Now in section A subsection 1
5819 .word 0x1234
5820 .section B
5821 .subsection 0
5822 # Now in section B subsection 0
5823 .word 0x5678
5824 .subsection 1
5825 # Now in section B subsection 1
5826 .word 0x9abc
5827 .previous
5828 # Now in section B subsection 0
5829 .word 0xdef0
5830 @end smallexample
5831
5832 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
5833 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
5834
5835 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
5836 the top section on the section stack.
5837 @end ifset
5838
5839 @node Print
5840 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
5841
5842 @cindex @code{print} directive
5843 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
5844 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
5845
5846 @ifset ELF
5847 @node Protected
5848 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
5849
5850 @cindex @code{protected} directive
5851 @cindex visibility
5852 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5853 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
5854
5855 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5856 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5857 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
5858 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
5859 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
5860 this.
5861 @end ifset
5862
5863 @node Psize
5864 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
5865
5866 @cindex @code{psize} directive
5867 @cindex listing control: paper size
5868 @cindex paper size, for listings
5869 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
5870 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
5871
5872 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
5873 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
5874 default width is 200 columns.
5875
5876 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
5877 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
5878 @code{.eject}).
5879
5880 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
5881 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
5882
5883 @node Purgem
5884 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
5885
5886 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
5887 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
5888 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
5889
5890 @ifset ELF
5891 @node PushSection
5892 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
5893
5894 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
5895 @cindex Section Stack
5896 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
5897 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5898 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
5899 (@pxref{Previous}).
5900
5901 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
5902 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
5903 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
5904 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
5905 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
5906 @end ifset
5907
5908 @node Quad
5909 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
5910
5911 @cindex @code{quad} directive
5912 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
5913 each bignum, it emits
5914 @ifclear bignum-16
5915 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
5916 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
5917 @cindex eight-byte integer
5918 @cindex integer, 8-byte
5919
5920 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5921 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
5922 @end ifclear
5923 @ifset bignum-16
5924 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
5925 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
5926 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
5927 @cindex integer, 16-byte
5928 @end ifset
5929
5930 @node Reloc
5931 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
5932
5933 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
5934 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
5935 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
5936 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
5937 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
5938 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
5939 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
5940 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
5941 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
5942 section.
5943
5944 @node Rept
5945 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
5946
5947 @cindex @code{rept} directive
5948 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
5949 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
5950
5951 For example, assembling
5952
5953 @example
5954 .rept 3
5955 .long 0
5956 .endr
5957 @end example
5958
5959 is equivalent to assembling
5960
5961 @example
5962 .long 0
5963 .long 0
5964 .long 0
5965 @end example
5966
5967 @node Sbttl
5968 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
5969
5970 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
5971 @cindex subtitles for listings
5972 @cindex listing control: subtitle
5973 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
5974 title line) when generating assembly listings.
5975
5976 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
5977 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
5978
5979 @ifset COFF
5980 @node Scl
5981 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
5982
5983 @cindex @code{scl} directive
5984 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
5985 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
5986 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
5987 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
5988 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
5989 symbolic debugging information.
5990 @ifset BOUT
5991
5992 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
5993 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
5994 accepts this directive but ignores it.
5995 @end ifset
5996 @end ifset
5997
5998 @ifset COFF-ELF
5999 @node Section
6000 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6001
6002 @cindex named section
6003 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6004 named @var{name}.
6005
6006 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6007 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6008 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6009
6010 @ifset COFF
6011 @ifset ELF
6012 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6013 @subheading COFF Version
6014 @end ifset
6015
6016 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6017 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6018 ways:
6019
6020 @smallexample
6021 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6022 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6023 @end smallexample
6024
6025 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6026 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6027 @table @code
6028 @item b
6029 bss section (uninitialized data)
6030 @item n
6031 section is not loaded
6032 @item w
6033 writable section
6034 @item d
6035 data section
6036 @item e
6037 exclude section from linking
6038 @item r
6039 read-only section
6040 @item x
6041 executable section
6042 @item s
6043 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6044 @item a
6045 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6046 @item y
6047 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6048 @item 0-9
6049 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6050 @end table
6051
6052 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6053 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6054 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6055 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6056 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6057
6058 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6059 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6060 @end ifset
6061
6062 @ifset ELF
6063 @ifset COFF
6064 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6065 @subheading ELF Version
6066 @end ifset
6067
6068 @cindex Section Stack
6069 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6070 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6071 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6072 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6073
6074 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6075 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6076
6077 @smallexample
6078 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6079 @end smallexample
6080
6081 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6082 combination of the following characters:
6083 @table @code
6084 @item a
6085 section is allocatable
6086 @item e
6087 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6088 @item w
6089 section is writable
6090 @item x
6091 section is executable
6092 @item M
6093 section is mergeable
6094 @item S
6095 section contains zero terminated strings
6096 @item G
6097 section is a member of a section group
6098 @item T
6099 section is used for thread-local-storage
6100 @item ?
6101 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6102 @end table
6103
6104 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6105 @table @code
6106 @item @@progbits
6107 section contains data
6108 @item @@nobits
6109 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6110 @item @@note
6111 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6112 @item @@init_array
6113 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6114 @item @@fini_array
6115 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6116 @item @@preinit_array
6117 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6118 @end table
6119
6120 Many targets only support the first three section types.
6121
6122 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6123 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6124 @code{%} character.
6125
6126 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6127 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6128
6129 @smallexample
6130 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6131 @end smallexample
6132
6133 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6134 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6135 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6136 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6137 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6138 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6139 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6140 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6141 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6142
6143 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6144 be present along with an additional field like this:
6145
6146 @smallexample
6147 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6148 @end smallexample
6149
6150 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6151 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6152 @table @code
6153 @item comdat
6154 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6155 @item .gnu.linkonce
6156 an alias for comdat
6157 @end table
6158
6159 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6160 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6161
6162 @smallexample
6163 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6164 @end smallexample
6165
6166 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6167 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6168 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6169 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6170 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6171 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6172
6173 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6174 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6175 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6176 executable. The section will contain data.
6177
6178 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6179 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6180
6181 @smallexample
6182 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6183 @end smallexample
6184
6185 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6186 separated flags:
6187 @table @code
6188 @item #alloc
6189 section is allocatable
6190 @item #write
6191 section is writable
6192 @item #execinstr
6193 section is executable
6194 @item #exclude
6195 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6196 @item #tls
6197 section is used for thread local storage
6198 @end table
6199
6200 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6201 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6202 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6203 work.
6204 @end ifset
6205 @end ifset
6206
6207 @node Set
6208 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6209
6210 @cindex @code{set} directive
6211 @cindex symbol value, setting
6212 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6213 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6214 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6215 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6216
6217 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly.
6218
6219 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6220 file is the last value stored into it.
6221
6222 @ifset Z80
6223 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6224 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6225 @end ifset
6226
6227 @node Short
6228 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6229
6230 @cindex @code{short} directive
6231 @ifset GENERIC
6232 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6233 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6234
6235 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6236 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6237 @end ifset
6238 @ifclear GENERIC
6239 @ifset W16
6240 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6241 @end ifset
6242 @ifset W32
6243 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6244 a 16 bit number for each.
6245 @end ifset
6246 @end ifclear
6247
6248 @node Single
6249 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6250
6251 @cindex @code{single} directive
6252 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6253 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6254 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6255 @ifset GENERIC
6256 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6257 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6258 @end ifset
6259 @ifclear GENERIC
6260 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6261 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6262 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6263 @end ifset
6264 @end ifclear
6265
6266 @ifset COFF-ELF
6267 @node Size
6268 @section @code{.size}
6269
6270 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6271
6272 @ifset COFF
6273 @ifset ELF
6274 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6275 @subheading COFF Version
6276 @end ifset
6277
6278 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6279 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6280 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6281
6282 @smallexample
6283 .size @var{expression}
6284 @end smallexample
6285
6286 @ifset BOUT
6287 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6288 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6289 ignores it.
6290 @end ifset
6291 @end ifset
6292
6293 @ifset ELF
6294 @ifset COFF
6295 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6296 @subheading ELF Version
6297 @end ifset
6298
6299 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6300 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6301
6302 @smallexample
6303 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6304 @end smallexample
6305
6306 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6307 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6308 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6309 symbols.
6310 @end ifset
6311 @end ifset
6312
6313 @ifclear no-space-dir
6314 @node Skip
6315 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6316
6317 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6318 @cindex filling memory
6319 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6320 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6321 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6322 @samp{.space}.
6323 @end ifclear
6324
6325 @node Sleb128
6326 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6327
6328 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6329 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6330 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6331 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6332
6333 @ifclear no-space-dir
6334 @node Space
6335 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6336
6337 @cindex @code{space} directive
6338 @cindex filling memory
6339 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6340 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6341 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6342 as @samp{.skip}.
6343
6344 @ifset HPPA
6345 @quotation
6346 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6347 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6348 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6349 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6350 for a summary.
6351 @end quotation
6352 @end ifset
6353 @end ifclear
6354
6355 @ifset have-stabs
6356 @node Stab
6357 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6358
6359 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6360 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6361 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6362 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6363 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6364 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6365 Up to five fields are required:
6366
6367 @table @var
6368 @item string
6369 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6370 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6371 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6372 using this field.
6373
6374 @item type
6375 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6376 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6377 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6378
6379 @item other
6380 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6381 low 8 bits of this expression.
6382
6383 @item desc
6384 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6385 bits of this expression.
6386
6387 @item value
6388 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6389 @end table
6390
6391 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6392 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6393 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6394 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6395
6396 @table @code
6397 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6398 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6399
6400 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6401 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6402 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6403 strings.
6404
6405 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6406 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6407 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6408 assembled.
6409
6410 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6411 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6412 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6413
6414 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6415 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6416 All five fields are specified.
6417 @end table
6418 @end ifset
6419 @c end have-stabs
6420
6421 @node String
6422 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6423 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6424
6425 @cindex string, copying to object file
6426 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6427 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6428 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6429 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6430 @cindex @code{string} directive
6431 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6432 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6433 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6434 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6435
6436 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6437 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6438 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6439 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6440
6441 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6442 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6443 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6444 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6445
6446 Example:
6447 @smallexample
6448 .string32 "BYE"
6449 expands to:
6450 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6451 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6452 @end smallexample
6453
6454
6455 @node Struct
6456 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6457
6458 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6459 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6460 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6461 @smallexample
6462 .struct 0
6463 field1:
6464 .struct field1 + 4
6465 field2:
6466 .struct field2 + 4
6467 field3:
6468 @end smallexample
6469 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6470 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6471 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6472 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6473 before further assembly.
6474
6475 @ifset ELF
6476 @node SubSection
6477 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6478
6479 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6480 @cindex Section Stack
6481 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6482 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6483 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6484 (@pxref{Previous}).
6485
6486 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6487 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6488 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6489 @end ifset
6490
6491 @ifset ELF
6492 @node Symver
6493 @section @code{.symver}
6494 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6495 @cindex symbol versioning
6496 @cindex versions of symbols
6497 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6498 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6499 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6500 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6501 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6502 shared library.
6503
6504 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6505 @smallexample
6506 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6507 @end smallexample
6508 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6509 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6510 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6511 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6512 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6513 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6514 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6515 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6516 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6517 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6518 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6519 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6520 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6521 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6522
6523 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6524 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6525 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6526 symbol table.
6527
6528 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6529 @smallexample
6530 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6531 @end smallexample
6532 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6533 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6534 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6535 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6536
6537 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6538 @smallexample
6539 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6540 @end smallexample
6541 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6542 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6543 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6544 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6545 @end ifset
6546
6547 @ifset COFF
6548 @node Tag
6549 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6550
6551 @cindex COFF structure debugging
6552 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
6553 @cindex @code{tag} directive
6554 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6555 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
6556 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
6557 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6558 @ifset BOUT
6559
6560 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6561 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6562 ignores it.
6563 @end ifset
6564 @end ifset
6565
6566 @node Text
6567 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6568
6569 @cindex @code{text} directive
6570 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6571 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6572 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6573 is used.
6574
6575 @node Title
6576 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6577
6578 @cindex @code{title} directive
6579 @cindex listing control: title line
6580 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6581 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6582
6583 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6584 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6585
6586 @ifset COFF-ELF
6587 @node Type
6588 @section @code{.type}
6589
6590 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6591
6592 @ifset COFF
6593 @ifset ELF
6594 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6595 @subheading COFF Version
6596 @end ifset
6597
6598 @cindex COFF symbol type
6599 @cindex symbol type, COFF
6600 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6601 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6602 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6603
6604 @smallexample
6605 .type @var{int}
6606 @end smallexample
6607
6608 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6609 entry.
6610
6611 @ifset BOUT
6612 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6613 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6614 directive but ignores it.
6615 @end ifset
6616 @end ifset
6617
6618 @ifset ELF
6619 @ifset COFF
6620 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6621 @subheading ELF Version
6622 @end ifset
6623
6624 @cindex ELF symbol type
6625 @cindex symbol type, ELF
6626 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6627 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6628
6629 @smallexample
6630 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6631 @end smallexample
6632
6633 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6634 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
6635 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6636 compatibility with various other assemblers.
6637
6638 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6639 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6640 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
6641 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6642 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6643 assemblers.
6644
6645 The syntaxes supported are:
6646
6647 @smallexample
6648 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6649 .type <name>,#<type>
6650 .type <name>,@@<type>
6651 .type <name>,%<type>
6652 .type <name>,"<type>"
6653 @end smallexample
6654
6655 The types supported are:
6656
6657 @table @gcctabopt
6658 @item STT_FUNC
6659 @itemx function
6660 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6661
6662 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6663 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
6664 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6665 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
6666
6667 @item STT_OBJECT
6668 @itemx object
6669 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6670
6671 @item STT_TLS
6672 @itemx tls_object
6673 Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6674
6675 @item STT_COMMON
6676 @itemx common
6677 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6678
6679 @item STT_NOTYPE
6680 @itemx notype
6681 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
6682
6683 @item gnu_unique_object
6684 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
6685 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6686 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
6687 systems).
6688
6689 @end table
6690
6691 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6692
6693 @end ifset
6694 @end ifset
6695
6696 @node Uleb128
6697 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6698
6699 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6700 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
6701 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6702 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6703
6704 @ifset COFF
6705 @node Val
6706 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6707
6708 @cindex @code{val} directive
6709 @cindex COFF value attribute
6710 @cindex value attribute, COFF
6711 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6712 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6713 entry.
6714 @ifset BOUT
6715
6716 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6717 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6718 @end ifset
6719 @end ifset
6720
6721 @ifset ELF
6722 @node Version
6723 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6724
6725 @cindex @code{version} directive
6726 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6727 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6728 @end ifset
6729
6730 @ifset ELF
6731 @node VTableEntry
6732 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6733
6734 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6735 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6736 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6737
6738 @node VTableInherit
6739 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6740
6741 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6742 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6743 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6744 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
6745 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6746 @end ifset
6747
6748 @node Warning
6749 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6750 @cindex warning directive
6751 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6752 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6753
6754 @node Weak
6755 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6756
6757 @cindex @code{weak} directive
6758 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6759 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6760
6761 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
6762 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6763 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6764
6765 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6766 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6767 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6768
6769 @node Weakref
6770 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6771
6772 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
6773 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6774 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6775 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6776 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6777 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6778
6779 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6780 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6781 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6782 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6783 had the references to the alias removed.
6784
6785 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6786 within the assembler.
6787
6788 @node Word
6789 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6790
6791 @cindex @code{word} directive
6792 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6793 separated by commas.
6794 @ifclear GENERIC
6795 @ifset W32
6796 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6797 @end ifset
6798 @ifset W16
6799 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6800 @end ifset
6801 @end ifclear
6802 @ifset GENERIC
6803
6804 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6805 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6806 @end ifset
6807
6808 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6809 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6810 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6811 @cindex difference tables altered
6812 @cindex altered difference tables
6813 @quotation
6814 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
6815 @end quotation
6816
6817 @ifset GENERIC
6818 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
6819 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
6820 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
6821 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
6822
6823 @end ifset
6824 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
6825 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
6826 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
6827 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
6828 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
6829 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
6830 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
6831 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
6832 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
6833 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
6834 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
6835 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
6836 @code{sym2}.
6837
6838 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
6839 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
6840 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
6841 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
6842 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
6843 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
6844 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
6845
6846 @ifset INTERNALS
6847 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
6848 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
6849 assembly language programmers.
6850 @end ifset
6851 @end ifset
6852 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6853
6854 @node Deprecated
6855 @section Deprecated Directives
6856
6857 @cindex deprecated directives
6858 @cindex obsolescent directives
6859 One day these directives won't work.
6860 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
6861 @table @t
6862 @item .abort
6863 @item .line
6864 @end table
6865
6866 @ifset ELF
6867 @node Object Attributes
6868 @chapter Object Attributes
6869 @cindex object attributes
6870
6871 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
6872 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
6873 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
6874 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
6875 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
6876 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
6877 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
6878 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
6879 newer generation at run-time.
6880
6881 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
6882 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
6883 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
6884 correctly.
6885
6886 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
6887 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
6888 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
6889 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
6890 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
6891 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
6892
6893 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
6894 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
6895
6896 @menu
6897 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6898 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
6899 @end menu
6900
6901 @node GNU Object Attributes
6902 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6903
6904 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
6905 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
6906
6907 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
6908 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
6909 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
6910 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
6911 architecture-dependent ones.
6912
6913 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
6914
6915 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
6916
6917 @table @r
6918 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
6919 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
6920 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
6921 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
6922 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
6923 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
6924 @end table
6925
6926 @subsection MIPS Attributes
6927
6928 @table @r
6929 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
6930 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6931
6932 @itemize @bullet
6933 @item
6934 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
6935 @item
6936 1 for files using the hardware floating-point with a standard double-precision
6937 FPU.
6938 @item
6939 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
6940 @item
6941 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6942 @item
6943 4 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit wide
6944 double-precision floating-point registers and 32-bit wide general
6945 purpose registers.
6946 @end itemize
6947 @end table
6948
6949 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
6950
6951 @table @r
6952 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
6953 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6954
6955 @itemize @bullet
6956 @item
6957 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
6958 @item
6959 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6960 @item
6961 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6962 @item
6963 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6964 @end itemize
6965
6966 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
6967 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
6968
6969 @itemize @bullet
6970 @item
6971 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
6972 @item
6973 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
6974 @item
6975 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
6976 @item
6977 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
6978 @end itemize
6979 @end table
6980
6981 @node Defining New Object Attributes
6982 @section Defining New Object Attributes
6983
6984 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
6985 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
6986 mailing list.
6987
6988 @itemize @bullet
6989 @item
6990 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
6991 @item
6992 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
6993 @item
6994 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
6995 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
6996 @item
6997 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
6998 @item
6999 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7000 @item
7001 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7002 @end itemize
7003
7004 @end ifset
7005
7006 @ifset GENERIC
7007 @node Machine Dependencies
7008 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7009
7010 @cindex machine dependencies
7011 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7012 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7013 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7014 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7015 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7016 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7017 optimization.
7018
7019 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7020 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7021 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7022
7023 @menu
7024 @ifset AARCH64
7025 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7026 @end ifset
7027 @ifset ALPHA
7028 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7029 @end ifset
7030 @ifset ARC
7031 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7032 @end ifset
7033 @ifset ARM
7034 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7035 @end ifset
7036 @ifset AVR
7037 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7038 @end ifset
7039 @ifset Blackfin
7040 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7041 @end ifset
7042 @ifset CR16
7043 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7044 @end ifset
7045 @ifset CRIS
7046 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7047 @end ifset
7048 @ifset D10V
7049 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7050 @end ifset
7051 @ifset D30V
7052 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7053 @end ifset
7054 @ifset EPIPHANY
7055 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7056 @end ifset
7057 @ifset H8/300
7058 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7059 @end ifset
7060 @ifset HPPA
7061 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7062 @end ifset
7063 @ifset I370
7064 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7065 @end ifset
7066 @ifset I80386
7067 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7068 @end ifset
7069 @ifset I860
7070 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7071 @end ifset
7072 @ifset I960
7073 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7074 @end ifset
7075 @ifset IA64
7076 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7077 @end ifset
7078 @ifset IP2K
7079 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7080 @end ifset
7081 @ifset LM32
7082 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7083 @end ifset
7084 @ifset M32C
7085 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7086 @end ifset
7087 @ifset M32R
7088 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7089 @end ifset
7090 @ifset M680X0
7091 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7092 @end ifset
7093 @ifset M68HC11
7094 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7095 @end ifset
7096 @ifset METAG
7097 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7098 @end ifset
7099 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7100 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7101 @end ifset
7102 @ifset MIPS
7103 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7104 @end ifset
7105 @ifset MMIX
7106 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7107 @end ifset
7108 @ifset MSP430
7109 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7110 @end ifset
7111 @ifset NIOSII
7112 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7113 @end ifset
7114 @ifset NS32K
7115 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7116 @end ifset
7117 @ifset SH
7118 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7119 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7120 @end ifset
7121 @ifset PDP11
7122 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7123 @end ifset
7124 @ifset PJ
7125 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7126 @end ifset
7127 @ifset PPC
7128 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7129 @end ifset
7130 @ifset RL78
7131 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7132 @end ifset
7133 @ifset RX
7134 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7135 @end ifset
7136 @ifset S390
7137 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7138 @end ifset
7139 @ifset SCORE
7140 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7141 @end ifset
7142 @ifset SPARC
7143 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7144 @end ifset
7145 @ifset TIC54X
7146 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7147 @end ifset
7148 @ifset TIC6X
7149 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7150 @end ifset
7151 @ifset TILEGX
7152 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7153 @end ifset
7154 @ifset TILEPRO
7155 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7156 @end ifset
7157 @ifset V850
7158 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7159 @end ifset
7160 @ifset XGATE
7161 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7162 @end ifset
7163 @ifset XSTORMY16
7164 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7165 @end ifset
7166 @ifset XTENSA
7167 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7168 @end ifset
7169 @ifset Z80
7170 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7171 @end ifset
7172 @ifset Z8000
7173 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7174 @end ifset
7175 @ifset VAX
7176 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7177 @end ifset
7178 @end menu
7179
7180 @lowersections
7181 @end ifset
7182
7183 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7184 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7185 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7186 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7187 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7188 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7189 @c in both conditional blocks.
7190
7191 @ifset AARCH64
7192 @include c-aarch64.texi
7193 @end ifset
7194
7195 @ifset ALPHA
7196 @include c-alpha.texi
7197 @end ifset
7198
7199 @ifset ARC
7200 @include c-arc.texi
7201 @end ifset
7202
7203 @ifset ARM
7204 @include c-arm.texi
7205 @end ifset
7206
7207 @ifset AVR
7208 @include c-avr.texi
7209 @end ifset
7210
7211 @ifset Blackfin
7212 @include c-bfin.texi
7213 @end ifset
7214
7215 @ifset CR16
7216 @include c-cr16.texi
7217 @end ifset
7218
7219 @ifset CRIS
7220 @include c-cris.texi
7221 @end ifset
7222
7223 @ifset Renesas-all
7224 @ifclear GENERIC
7225 @node Machine Dependencies
7226 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7227
7228 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7229 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7230 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7231 family.
7232
7233 @menu
7234 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7235 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7236 @end menu
7237 @lowersections
7238 @end ifclear
7239 @end ifset
7240
7241 @ifset D10V
7242 @include c-d10v.texi
7243 @end ifset
7244
7245 @ifset D30V
7246 @include c-d30v.texi
7247 @end ifset
7248
7249 @ifset EPIPHANY
7250 @include c-epiphany.texi
7251 @end ifset
7252
7253 @ifset H8/300
7254 @include c-h8300.texi
7255 @end ifset
7256
7257 @ifset HPPA
7258 @include c-hppa.texi
7259 @end ifset
7260
7261 @ifset I370
7262 @include c-i370.texi
7263 @end ifset
7264
7265 @ifset I80386
7266 @include c-i386.texi
7267 @end ifset
7268
7269 @ifset I860
7270 @include c-i860.texi
7271 @end ifset
7272
7273 @ifset I960
7274 @include c-i960.texi
7275 @end ifset
7276
7277 @ifset IA64
7278 @include c-ia64.texi
7279 @end ifset
7280
7281 @ifset IP2K
7282 @include c-ip2k.texi
7283 @end ifset
7284
7285 @ifset LM32
7286 @include c-lm32.texi
7287 @end ifset
7288
7289 @ifset M32C
7290 @include c-m32c.texi
7291 @end ifset
7292
7293 @ifset M32R
7294 @include c-m32r.texi
7295 @end ifset
7296
7297 @ifset M680X0
7298 @include c-m68k.texi
7299 @end ifset
7300
7301 @ifset M68HC11
7302 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7303 @end ifset
7304
7305 @ifset METAG
7306 @include c-metag.texi
7307 @end ifset
7308
7309 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7310 @include c-microblaze.texi
7311 @end ifset
7312
7313 @ifset MIPS
7314 @include c-mips.texi
7315 @end ifset
7316
7317 @ifset MMIX
7318 @include c-mmix.texi
7319 @end ifset
7320
7321 @ifset MSP430
7322 @include c-msp430.texi
7323 @end ifset
7324
7325 @ifset NIOSII
7326 @include c-nios2.texi
7327 @end ifset
7328
7329 @ifset NS32K
7330 @include c-ns32k.texi
7331 @end ifset
7332
7333 @ifset PDP11
7334 @include c-pdp11.texi
7335 @end ifset
7336
7337 @ifset PJ
7338 @include c-pj.texi
7339 @end ifset
7340
7341 @ifset PPC
7342 @include c-ppc.texi
7343 @end ifset
7344
7345 @ifset RL78
7346 @include c-rl78.texi
7347 @end ifset
7348
7349 @ifset RX
7350 @include c-rx.texi
7351 @end ifset
7352
7353 @ifset S390
7354 @include c-s390.texi
7355 @end ifset
7356
7357 @ifset SCORE
7358 @include c-score.texi
7359 @end ifset
7360
7361 @ifset SH
7362 @include c-sh.texi
7363 @include c-sh64.texi
7364 @end ifset
7365
7366 @ifset SPARC
7367 @include c-sparc.texi
7368 @end ifset
7369
7370 @ifset TIC54X
7371 @include c-tic54x.texi
7372 @end ifset
7373
7374 @ifset TIC6X
7375 @include c-tic6x.texi
7376 @end ifset
7377
7378 @ifset TILEGX
7379 @include c-tilegx.texi
7380 @end ifset
7381
7382 @ifset TILEPRO
7383 @include c-tilepro.texi
7384 @end ifset
7385
7386 @ifset Z80
7387 @include c-z80.texi
7388 @end ifset
7389
7390 @ifset Z8000
7391 @include c-z8k.texi
7392 @end ifset
7393
7394 @ifset VAX
7395 @include c-vax.texi
7396 @end ifset
7397
7398 @ifset V850
7399 @include c-v850.texi
7400 @end ifset
7401
7402 @ifset XGATE
7403 @include c-xgate.texi
7404 @end ifset
7405
7406 @ifset XSTORMY16
7407 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7408 @end ifset
7409
7410 @ifset XTENSA
7411 @include c-xtensa.texi
7412 @end ifset
7413
7414 @ifset GENERIC
7415 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7416 @raisesections
7417 @end ifset
7418
7419 @node Reporting Bugs
7420 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7421 @cindex bugs in assembler
7422 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7423
7424 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7425
7426 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7427 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7428 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7429 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7430
7431 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7432 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7433
7434 @menu
7435 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7436 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7437 @end menu
7438
7439 @node Bug Criteria
7440 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7441 @cindex bug criteria
7442
7443 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7444
7445 @itemize @bullet
7446 @cindex fatal signal
7447 @cindex assembler crash
7448 @cindex crash of assembler
7449 @item
7450 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7451 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7452
7453 @cindex error on valid input
7454 @item
7455 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7456
7457 @cindex invalid input
7458 @item
7459 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7460 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7461 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7462
7463 @item
7464 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7465 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7466 @end itemize
7467
7468 @node Bug Reporting
7469 @section How to Report Bugs
7470 @cindex bug reports
7471 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7472
7473 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7474 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7475 contact that organization first.
7476
7477 You can find contact information for many support companies and
7478 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7479 distribution.
7480
7481 @ifset BUGURL
7482 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7483 to @value{BUGURL}.
7484 @end ifset
7485
7486 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7487 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7488 fact or leave it out, state it!
7489
7490 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7491 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
7492 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
7493 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7494 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7495 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7496 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
7497 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7498 and the most helpful.
7499
7500 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7501 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7502 that the bug has not been reported previously.
7503
7504 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7505 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7506 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7507 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7508
7509 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7510
7511 @itemize @bullet
7512 @item
7513 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7514 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7515
7516 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7517 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7518
7519 @item
7520 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7521
7522 @item
7523 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7524 version number.
7525
7526 @item
7527 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7528 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7529
7530 @item
7531 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7532 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7533 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7534
7535 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7536 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7537
7538 @item
7539 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
7540 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7541 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7542 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7543 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7544 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7545 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7546
7547 @item
7548 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7549 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7550
7551 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7552 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7553 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
7554 make a mistake.
7555
7556 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7557 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7558 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7559 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
7560 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7561 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
7562 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7563 observations.
7564
7565 @item
7566 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7567 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7568 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
7569 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7570 by line number.
7571
7572 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7573 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7574 @end itemize
7575
7576 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7577
7578 @itemize @bullet
7579 @item
7580 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7581
7582 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7583 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7584 changes will not affect it.
7585
7586 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7587 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7588 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7589 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7590
7591 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7592 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7593 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7594 less time, and so on.
7595
7596 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7597 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7598
7599 @item
7600 A patch for the bug.
7601
7602 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7603 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7604 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7605 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7606
7607 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7608 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7609 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7610 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7611
7612 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7613 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7614 help us to understand.
7615
7616 @item
7617 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7618
7619 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7620 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7621 @end itemize
7622
7623 @node Acknowledgements
7624 @chapter Acknowledgements
7625
7626 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7627 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
7628 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
7629 @c (October 2012),
7630 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
7631
7632 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7633 more details?}
7634
7635 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7636 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7637 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7638
7639 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7640 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7641 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7642 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7643 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7644 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7645 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7646 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7647 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7648 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7649
7650 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7651 in format-specific I/O modules.
7652
7653 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
7654 has done much work with it since.
7655
7656 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7657
7658 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7659
7660 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7661 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7662
7663 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7664 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7665 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7666 support a.out format.
7667
7668 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7669 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7670 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7671 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7672 targets.
7673
7674 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7675 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
7676 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7677 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7678 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7679 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7680 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7681
7682 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7683 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7684 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7685 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7686
7687 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7688
7689 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7690
7691 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7692 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7693 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7694 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7695
7696 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7697 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7698 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7699 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7700 and some initial 64-bit support).
7701
7702 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7703
7704 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7705 support for openVMS/Alpha.
7706
7707 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7708 flavors.
7709
7710 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7711 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7712
7713 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7714 configuration enhancements.
7715
7716 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7717
7718 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
7719 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7720 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7721 intentionally leaving anyone out.
7722
7723 @node GNU Free Documentation License
7724 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7725 @include fdl.texi
7726
7727 @node AS Index
7728 @unnumbered AS Index
7729
7730 @printindex cp
7731
7732 @bye
7733 @c Local Variables:
7734 @c fill-column: 79
7735 @c End:
This page took 0.208707 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.